User manual | Bosch MBV-BPRO-40 Operator`s manual


Add to my manuals
220 Pages

advertisement

User manual | Bosch MBV-BPRO-40 Operator`s manual | Manualzz

Bosch Video Management System

MBV-BPRO-40 en Configuration Manual

Bosch Video Management System Table of Contents | en 3

Table of contents

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.4.1

6.4.2

6.4.3

6.4.4

6.4.5

6.4.6

6.4.7

6.4.8

6.4.9

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

6.10

5.1

5.2

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

5.7

6

6.11

6.12

6.13

6.14

6.15

6.16

6.17

6.18

6.19

3.1

3.2

3.3

4

4.1

5

2

3

1

1.1

1.2

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Using the Help

Finding information

Printing the Help

Introduction

System overview

Hardware requirements

Software requirements

License requirements

Network configuration

Installing hardware

Getting started

Installing the software modules

Activating the software licenses

Starting Configuration Client

Configuring the language of Configuration Client

Configuring the language of Operator Client

Adding a new license

Working offline

Configuring devices

Adding multiple Management Server computers

Detecting NVRs, their recorded encoders, and decoders

Detecting VRM devices

Configuring NVRs

Configuring a Primary NVR

Switching an NVR to a Failover NVR

Switching an NVR to a Redundant NVR

Configuring a Failover NVR

Configuring a Redundant NVR

Assigning NVRs to Failover NVRs

Assigning NVRs to a Redundant NVR

Displaying information on an NVR

Changing the network address of an NVR / Failover NVR / Redundant NVR

Adding a device

Configuring an encoder / decoder

Configuring a decoder for use with a CCTV keyboard

Configuring multiple encoders / decoders

Configuring a DiBos system

Configuring a Bosch Allegiant device

Configuring a startup Command Script

Changing the network address of a workstation

Enabling Forensic Search on a workstation

Assigning an analog monitor group to a workstation

Configuring an analog monitor group

Adding a monitor wall

Configuring a communication device

Configuring a peripheral device

Configuring network monitoring

Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

27

27

28

28

29

23

24

25

25

26

27

27

32

33

34

34

29

29

32

18

18

19

19

19

19

20

21

36

36

36

36

34

34

35

35

35

16

17

18

15

15

15

11

11

11

13

15

4 en | Table of Contents

9.3

9.4

9.5

9.6

9.7

10

10.1

10.2

8.6

8.7

8.8

9

9.1

9.2

7.7

7.8

7.9

7.10

7.11

7.12

7.13

8

8.1

8.2

8.3

8.4

8.5

6.25

6.26

6.27

6.28

6.29

6.30

6.31

6.20

6.21

6.22

6.23

6.24

7.2

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.6

6.32

6.33

6.34

7

7.1

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (workstation)

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (decoder)

Configuring an I/O module

Configuring an Allegiant CCL emulation

Adding a mobile video service

Adding a VRM device with iSCSI storage

Configuring an iSCSI device

Adding a LUN

Formatting a LUN

Adding a local storage or live only device

Adding a Video Streaming Gateway device

Adding a Bosch camera to a VSG

Adding an ONVIF camera to a VSG

Configuring multicast for VSG

Switching on VSG recording

Configuring the structure

Configuring the Logical Tree

Adding a device to the Logical Tree

Removing a tree item

Managing resource files

Adding a Command Script

Managing pre-configured camera sequences

Adding a camera sequence

Adding a folder

Adding a map

Adding a link to another map

Assigning a map to a folder

Managing devices on a map

Adding a document

Configuring schedules

Configuring a Recording Schedule

Adding a Task Schedule

Configuring a standard Task Schedule

Configuring a recurring Task Schedule

Removing a Task Schedule

Adding holidays and exception days

Removing holidays and exception days

Renaming a schedule

Configuring cameras and recording settings

Copying and pasting in tables

Configuring stream quality settings

Configuring camera properties

Configuring recording settings (only VRM and Local Storage)

Configuring recording settings (only NVR)

Configuring port settings

Configuring PTZ camera settings

Configuring events and alarms

Copying and pasting in tables

Removing a table row

Configuration Manual

Bosch Video Management System

55

55

56

56

57

57

58

59

60

61

61

44

44

44

44

44

46

46

42

43

43

48

48

49

49

51

47

47

48

51

52

52

52

53

53

54

54

38

38

40

40

40

41

42

37

37

37

38

38

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Table of Contents | en 5

12.10

12.11

12.12

12.13

12.14

13

13.1

13.2

13.3

13.4

14

14.1

14.1.1

14.1.2

15.1

15.2

15.3

15.4

15.5

14.1.3

14.2

14.3

14.4

15

11.4

11.5

12

12.1

12.2

12.3

12.4

12.5

12.6

12.7

12.8

12.9

10.3

10.4

10.5

10.6

10.7

10.8

10.9

10.10

10.11

11

11.1

11.2

11.3

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Managing resource files

Configuring an event

Duplicating an event

Logging user events

Configuring user event buttons

Creating a Compound Event

Editing a Compound Event

Configuring an alarm

Configuring settings for all alarms

Configuring Command Scripts

Managing Command Scripts

Configuring a Command Script to be started automatically

Importing a Command Script

Exporting a Command Script

Configuring a startup Command Script

Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access

Creating a user

Creating a group or account

Creating a dual authorization group

Configuring LDAP settings

Associating an LDAP group

Scheduling user logon permission

Configuring operating permissions

Configuring user interface settings

Configuring permissions for Logical Tree

Configuring permissions for events and alarms

Configuring camera permissions

Configuring decoder permissions

Configuring various priorities

Copying user group permissions

Managing configuration data

Activating the working configuration

Activating a configuration

Exporting configuration data

Exporting configuration data to OPC

Configuration examples

Creating an Enterprise System

Adding multiple Management Server computers

Creating an Enterprise User Group

Creating an Enterprise Account

Adding a Bosch ATM/POS bridge

Adding a Bosch Allegiant input alarm

Adding and configuring 2 Dinion IP cameras with VRM recording

Global Configuration Client windows

Configuration window

Menu commands

Activation Manager dialog box

Activate Configuration dialog box

License Manager dialog box

Configuration Manual

78

79

79

79

81

81

81

83

76

76

78

75

75

75

89

90

91

92

92

84

86

87

87

89

69

70

71

72

67

67

69

72

73

73

74

74

63

64

64

65

66

66

67

67

61

61

62

62

62

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

6 en | Table of Contents

16.11.4

16.11.5

16.12

16.12.1

16.12.2

16.12.3

16.12.4

16.13

16.13.1

16.13.2

16.14

16.15

16.9.3

16.9.4

16.9.5

16.9.6

16.9.7

16.10

16.11

16.11.1

16.11.2

16.11.3

16.15.1

16.15.2

16.16

16.16.1

16.17

16.17.1

16.17.2

16.17.3

16.17.4

16.17.5

15.6

15.7

15.8

15.9

16

16.1

16.1.1

16.2

16.3

16.4

16.5

16.6

16.7

16.8

16.9

16.9.1

16.9.2

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

License Activation dialog box

Alarm Settings dialog box

Stream Quality Settings dialog box

Options dialog box

Devices page

Server List page

Add Server dialog box

Initial Device Scan dialog box

NVR & Decoder Scan dialog box

Bosch VMS Scan Wizard

Failover NVR Manager dialog box

IP Device Configuration dialog box

Set IP Addresses dialog box

Set Display Names dialog box

NVRs / Failover NVRs / Redundant NVRs page

Global Settings page

Disk Storage page

Camera Storage page

Assigned NVRs page

Assigned NVR page

Add Network Path dialog box

Add Local NVR Drive dialog box

Vidos NVRs page

DiBos page

Add DiBos System dialog box

Settings page

Cameras page

Inputs page

Relays page

Matrix Switches page

Connection page

Cameras page

Outputs page

Inputs page

Workstation page

Settings page

Assigned Analog Monitor Groups page

Decoders page

Analog Monitor Groups page

Settings page

Advanced Configuration page

Monitor Wall page

Add Monitor Wall dialog box

Communication Devices page

E-mail/SMTP Server dialog box

Add SMS Device dialog box

SMTP Server page

Send Test E-mail dialog box

GSM Settings / SMSC Settings page

Configuration Manual

Bosch Video Management System

105

106

106

107

108

108

108

104

104

105

105

105

103

103

104

104

104

101

102

102

103

103

111

111

111

112

112

108

109

110

110

111

96

96

97

97

97

92

93

93

94

95

99

99

100

100

98

98

99

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.25

16.26

16.26.1

16.26.2

16.26.3

16.26.4

16.26.5

16.26.6

16.26.7

16.26.8

16.27

16.28

16.29

16.30

16.31

16.32

16.33

16.33.1

16.33.2

16.34

17

17.1

17.1.1

17.1.2

17.1.3

17.2

17.3

17.3.1

17.3.2

17.3.3

16.20.2

16.20.3

16.21

16.22

16.22.1

16.22.2

16.22.3

16.23

16.24

16.24.1

16.18

16.18.1

16.18.2

16.18.3

16.18.4

16.19

16.19.1

16.20

16.20.1

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

POS + ATM page

Add Bosch ATM/POS-Bridge dialog box

Bosch ATM/POS-Bridge page

Inputs page

ATM Settings page

Virtual Inputs page

Add Virtual Inputs dialog box

SNMP page

Add SNMP dialog box

SNMP Trap Receiver page

SNMP Trap Logger dialog box

CCTV Keyboards page

I/O Modules page

ADAM page

Inputs page

Relays page

Allegiant CCL Emulation page

Mobile Video Service page

Add Mobile Video Service dialog box

VRM Devices page

VRM Settings page

Advanced page

SNMP page iSCSI System Access page

Default Configuration page

Load Balancing page

iqn-Mapper dialog box

LUNs page

Add LUN dialog box

Video Streaming Gateway device page

Assignment tab (Video Streaming Gateway)

Add/Edit dialog box (Video Streaming Gateway)

Recording profiles tab (Video Streaming Gateway)

Multicast tabs (Video Streaming Gateway)

Advanced tab (Video Streaming Gateway)

Live Only page

ONVIF Encoder page

Add ONVIF dialog box

Local Storage page

Encoders / Decoders page

Main Settings > Unit Access page

Identification / Camera identification

Camera name

Version information

Main Settings > Date/Time page

Advanced Settings > Video Input page

Picture settings

Input termination

Source type

Configuration Manual

Table of Contents | en 7

122

122

123

123

123

119

120

121

121

121

123

124

124

126

126

126

127

127

127

127

117

118

118

119

119

115

116

116

117

117

113

113

114

114

114

114

115

115

115

129

129

129

130

130

128

128

128

129

129

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

8 en | Table of Contents

17.17

17.18

17.19

17.20

17.21

17.21.1

17.22

17.23

17.23.1

17.23.2

17.23.3

17.23.4

17.23.5

17.23.6

17.23.7

17.24

17.25

17.25.1

17.25.2

17.26

18.2

18.3

18.4

18.5

18.6

17.27

17.27.1

17.27.2

18

18.1

17.10

17.11

17.12

17.12.1

17.12.2

17.12.3

17.13

17.14

17.15

17.16

17.4

17.5

17.6

17.6.1

17.6.2

17.6.3

17.7

17.8

17.9

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Advanced Settings > Recording Management page

Advanced Settings > Recording preferences page

Advanced Settings > VCA page

Motion detector (MOTION+ only)

Select Area dialog box

Tamper detection

Advanced Settings > Audio Alarm page

Advanced Settings > Alarm Rules page

Camera > Display Stamping page

Camera > Privacy Masks page

Camera > Camera page

Camera > Lens page

Focus

Iris

Zoom

Camera > PTZ page

Camera > Prepositions and Tours page

Camera > Sectors page

Camera > Installer Menu page

Camera > Misc page

Camera > Logs page

Camera > Audio page

Interfaces > Relay page

Interfaces > Periphery page

COM1

Network > Network Access page

Network > Advanced page

SNMP

802.1x

Encryption

RTSP

NTCIP

UPnP

TCP metadata input

Network > Multicast page

Network > FTP Posting page

JPEG posting

FTP server

Service > Licenses page

Decoder > Decoder page

Decoder profile

Monitor display

Maps and Structure page

Resource Manager dialog box

Select Resource dialog box

Sequence Builder dialog box

Add Sequence dialog box

Add Sequence Step dialog box

Add URL dialog box

Configuration Manual

Bosch Video Management System

143

144

145

145

145

142

142

142

143

143

146

146

146

146

146

146

147

147

148

148

148

148

149

150

151

151

151

152

153

153

140

140

141

141

141

137

138

139

139

140

130

131

132

133

133

134

135

135

136

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Table of Contents | en 9

23.1

23.2

23.3

23.4

23.5

23.6

23.7

23.8

23.9

23.10

21.4

21.5

22

22.1

22.2

22.3

22.4

23

20.4

20.5

21

21.1

21.2

21.3

18.7

19

19.1

19.2

20

20.1

20.2

20.3

23.18

24

24.1

24.2

24.2.1

24.2.2

24.2.3

24.2.4

24.3

24.3.1

23.11

23.12

23.13

23.14

23.15

23.16

23.17

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Select Map for Link dialog box

Schedules page

Recording Schedules page

Task Schedules page

Cameras and Recording page

Cameras page

Scheduled Recording Settings dialog box (only VRM and Local Storage)

Recording settings pages (NVR only)

Stream Quality Settings dialog box

PTZ Settings dialog box

Events page

Command Script Editor dialog box

Create Compound Event / Edit Compound Event dialog box

Select Script Language dialog box

Edit Priorities of Event Type dialog box

Select Devices dialog box

Alarms page

Alarm Settings dialog box

Select Image Pane Content dialog box

Select Resource dialog box

Alarm Options dialog box

User Groups page

Add New User Group/Account dialog box

User Group Properties page

User Properties page

Add New Dual Authorization Group dialog box

Logon Pair Properties page

Select User Groups dialog box

Camera Permissions page

Control Priorities

Copy User Group Permissions dialog box

Decoder Permissions page

Events and Alarms page

LDAP Server Settings dialog box

Credentials page

Logical Tree page

Operator Features page

Priorities page

User Interface page

Server Access page

Concepts

Alarm handling

Enterprise System

Scenarios

Permissions

Types of user groups

Licensing

Connecting Bosch Allegiant Matrix to Bosch Video Management System

Bosch Allegiant Connection Overview

Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

176

177

178

178

179

173

174

175

175

176

166

166

167

168

168

169

169

172

160

162

163

164

165

165

153

154

154

154

156

156

158

159

188

191

191

191

192

192

179

179

181

182

182

184

184

185

187

187

188

10 en | Table of Contents

24.3.2

24.3.3

24.4

24.5

24.5.1

24.5.2

24.5.3

25

25.1

25.2

25.3

25.4

Configuring the control channel

Bosch Allegiant Satellite System Concept

Allegiant CCL commands supported in Bosch VMS

Connecting CCTV keyboard to Bosch Video Management System

Scenarios for CCTV keyboard connections

Connecting a CCTV keyboard to a decoder

Updating CCTV keyboard firmware

Troubleshooting

Configuring the desired language in Windows

Reestablishing the connection to a CCTV keyboard

Reducing the number of Allegiant cameras

Restoring a system configuration

Bosch Video Management System

199

200

202

204

204

204

204

194

195

196

198

198

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Using the Help | en 11

1

1.1

Using the Help

To find out more about how to do something in Bosch Video Management System, access the online Help using any of the following methods.

To use the Contents, Index, or Search:

4 On the Help menu, click Help. Use the buttons and links to navigate.

To get Help on a window or dialog:

4

On the toolbar, click .

OR

4 Press F1 for help on any program window or dialog.

Finding information

You can find information in the Help in several ways.

To find information in the Online Help:

1.

On the Help menu, click Help.

2.

If the left-hand pane is not visible, click the Show button.

3.

In the Help window, do the following:

Click:

Contents

To:

Display the table of contents for the Online Help. Click each book to display pages that link to topics, and click each page to display the corresponding topic in the right-hand pane.

Index Search for specific words or phrases or select from a list of index keywords. Double-click the keyword to display the corresponding topic in the right-hand pane.

Search Locate words or phrases within the content of your topics. Type the word or phrase in the text field, press ENTER, and select the topic you want from the list of topics.

Texts of the user interface are marked bold.

4 The arrow invites you to click on the underlined text or to click an item in the application.

4

Click

Related Topics

to get step-by-step instructions

4 Click to display a topic with information on the application window you currently use.

This topic provides information on the application window controls.

Concepts, 187 provides background information on selected issues.

Caution!

Medium risk (without safety alert symbol): Indicates a potentially hazardous situation.

If not avoided, this may result in property damage or risk of damage to the unit.

Cautionary messages should be heeded to help you avoid data loss or damaging the system.

i

Notice!

This symbol indicates information or a company policy that relates directly or indirectly to the safety of personnel or protection of property.

1.2

Printing the Help

While using the Online Help, you can print topics and information right from the browser window.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

12 en | Using the Help

To print a Help topic:

1.

Right-click in the right pane and select Print.

The Print dialog box opens.

2.

Click Print. The topic is printed to the specified printer.

Bosch Video Management System

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

2 Introduction

Introduction | en 13

1

2

Menu bar

Toolbar

3 Playback controls

5 Performance meter

6

7

Slider for Image pane pattern

Image window

8 Image pane

Allows you to select a menu command.

Displays the available buttons. Point to an icon to display a tooltip.

Allows you to control instant playback or a camera sequence or alarm sequence.

Displays the CPU usage and the memory usage.

Allows you to select the required number of Image panes.

Displays the Image panes. Allows you to arrange the Image panes.

Displays a camera, a map, an image, a document (HTML file).

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

14 en | Introduction Bosch Video Management System

9

10

Alarm List window

PTZ Control window

Monitors window (only available if at least one analog monitor group has been configured)

Displays all alarms that the system generates.

Allows you to accept or clear an alarm or to start a workflow, for example, by sending an E-mail to a maintenance person.

Allows you to control a PTZ camera.

Displays the configured analog monitor groups.

Allows you to switch to the next or previous analog monitor group if available.

11 Logical Tree window

Favorites Tree window

Displays the devices your user group has access to. Allows you to select a device for assigning it to an Image pane.

Allows you to organize the devices of the

Logical Tree as required.

Map window Displays a site map. Allows you to drag the map to display a particular section of the map.

This manual guides you through the basic steps of the configuration and operation with Bosch

Video Management System.

For detailed help and step-by-step instructions read the Configuration Manual and the

Operator’s Manual or use the Online Help. You find the manuals as PDF files on your

Setup CD.

Bosch Video Management System integrates digital video, audio and data across any IP network.

The system consists of the following software modules:

– Management Server

VRM recording (Video Recording Manager)

Operator Client (VRM recording / DiBos DVRs / iSCSI recording / VIDOS NVRs / local

recording)

– Configuration Client

To achieve a running system, you must perform the following tasks:

Install services (Management Server and VRM)

– Install Operator Client and Configuration Client

– Connect to network

– Connect devices to network

– Basic configuration:

– Add devices (e.g. by device scan)

– Build logical structure

Configure schedules, cameras, events, and alarms

Configure user groups

– Operation

Bosch VMS Archive Player displays exported recordings.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

3

3.1

3.2

3.3

System overview

System overview | en 15

If you plan to install and configure Bosch Video Management System, participate in a system training on Bosch Video Management System.

Refer to the Release Notes of the current Bosch Video Management System version for supported versions of firmware and hardware and other important information.

See data sheets on Bosch workstations and servers for information on computers where

Bosch Video Management System can be installed.

The following software modules can optionally be installed on one PC.

Tasks of the software modules

– Management Server: Stream management, alarm management, priority management,

Management logbook, user management, device state management. Additional Enterprise

System license: Managing a server list that contains multiple Management Server computers.

– VRM: Distributing storage capacities on iSCSI devices to the encoders, while handling load balancing between multiple iSCSI devices.

Streaming playback video and audio data from iSCSI to Operator Clients.

– MVS: Provides a transcoding service that adapts the video stream from a camera configured in Bosch Video Management System to the available network bandwidth. This enables mobile video clients like an iPhone to receive live or playback video data via unreliable network connections with limited bandwidth. Not supported on Windows XP.

– Configuration Client: System configuration and administration for Operator Client.

– Operator Client: Live monitoring, storage retrieval and playback, alarm and accessing multiple Management Server computers simultaneously.

Hardware requirements

See the data sheet for Bosch Video Management System. Data sheets for platform PCs are also available.

Software requirements

See the data sheet for Bosch Video Management System.

Bosch Video Management System must not be installed on a computer where you want to install Bosch VMS Archive Player.

License requirements

See the data sheet for Bosch Video Management System for the available licenses.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

16 en | Network configuration Bosch Video Management System

4

!

Network configuration

Caution!

Do not connect a device to more than one Bosch Video Management System! This can lead to recording gaps and other undesired effects.

You can connect the following hardware to Bosch Video Management System:

Mobile video clients like iPhone or iPad via DynDNS

Various IP cameras. encoders and ONVIF cameras (live only or via Video Streaming

Gateway)

Connected via network

– Live only encoders with local storage

Connected via network

iSCSI storage devices

Connected via network

VIDOS NVR computer

Connected via network

– Analog cameras

Connected to encoders, DiBos / Bosch Recording Station

– Decoders

Connected via network

– Analog monitors

Connected to a decoder, to a Bosch Allegiant matrix, to a Bosch Video Management

System Client workstation

– DiBos / Bosch Recording Station (see the data sheet for Bosch Video Management

System for supported versions)

Connected via network

– Bosch Allegiant matrix (Firmware version: 8.75 or greater, MCS version: 2.80 or greater)

Connected to a COM port of the Management Server or to a remote computer and to an

IP encoder on the network.

– CCTV keyboard

Connected to the COM port of an Bosch Video Management System workstation

(Firmware version: 1.82 or greater) or to a hardware decoder (VIP XD).

If you connect the keyboard to a workstation, the user can control the complete system with the keyboard. If you connect the keyboard to a VIP XD decoder, the user can only control analog monitors with the keyboard.

Only the Bosch IntuiKey Digital Keyboard is supported.

– SMS device

Connected to a COM port of the Management Server

– SMTP E-mail server

Connected via network

POS

Connected via network

ATM

Connected via network

Network monitoring device

Connected via network

– I/O modules

Connected via network

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

4.1

Network configuration | en 17

Only ADAM devices are supported.

All devices connected via network are connected to a switch. The computers of the Bosch

Video Management System are also connected to this device.

Installing hardware

The following illustration shows an example of a small Bosch Video Management System network with NVR / DVR storage:

1

4

5

2

3

Bosch Allegiant matrix with cameras and monitor: Connected to a COM port of one of

the computers of the network and to IP encoders connected to the network

Management Server

Primary NVR

Failover NVR, Redundant NVR

Encoders with analog cameras

6

7

IP cameras and IP AutoDomes

Communication devices: SMTP E-mail server connected to network, GSM device

connected to a COM port of the Management Server

Virtual inputs 8

9

10

Operator Client workstations, Configuration Client workstation

Monitors connected to a decoder (analog monitor groups for alarm processing are possible)

11 DiBos Systems with cameras

Additionally you can connect the following devices:

ATM / POS (Automatic Teller Machine / Point of Sale)

RAID subsystems to increase storage capacity

– CCTV keyboard

Only Bosch IntuiKey Digital Keyboard is supported.

– I/O modules

Only ADAM devices are supported.

Local storage encoders

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

18 en | Getting started Bosch Video Management System

5

5.1

Getting started

This chapter provides information on how to get started with Bosch Video Management

System and with Bosch VMS Archive Player

Installing the software modules

Caution!

Do not install DiBos Web client on any Bosch VMS computer.

5.2

Install every software module on the computer that is supposed to be used for this module.

To install:

1.

Insert the product CD-ROM.

2.

Start setup.exe or start the Bosch Video Management System Setup on the Welcome screen.

3.

In the next dialog box, select the modules to be installed on this computer.

4.

Follow the instructions on the screen.

Activating the software licenses

Main window

When you install Bosch Video Management System for the first time, you must activate the licenses for the software packages that you have ordered, including the base package and any expansions and/or optional features.

To obtain the Activation Key for a license, you need the Authorization Number. This number is included in your product box.

With a Bundle Information file you can ease the process of activating.

Caution!

The computer signature is used for licensing. This computer signature can change after exchanging hardware on the Management Server computer. When the computer signature is changed, the license for the base package becomes invalid.

To avoid licensing problems, finish the hardware and software configuration before you generate the computer signature.

The following hardware changes can make the base license invalid:

Exchanging the network interface card.

Adding a VMWare or VPN virtual network interface.

Adding or activating a WLAN network interface.

Switchover of a Stratus server mainboard without teaming settings.

To activate the software:

1.

Start Configuration Client.

2.

On the Tools menu, click License Manager....

The License Manager dialog box is displayed.

3.

Click to check the boxes for the software package, the features, and the expansions that you want to activate. For the expansions, enter the number of licenses.

If you have received a Bundle Information file, click Import Bundle Info to import it.

4.

Click Activate.

The License Activation dialog box is displayed.

5.

Write down the computer signature or copy and paste it into a text file.

6.

On a computer with Internet access, enter the following URL into your browser: https://activation.boschsecurity.com

If you do not have an account to access the Bosch License Activation Center, either

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Getting started | en 19

5.3

5.4

5.5

5.6

create a new account (recommended) or click the link to activate a new license without logging on. If you create an account and log on before activating, the License Manager keeps track of your activations. You can then review this at any time.

Follow the instructions to obtain the License Activation Key.

7.

Return to the Bosch Video Management System software. In the License Activation dialog box, type the License Activation Key obtained from the License Manager and click

Activate.

The software package is activated.

Starting Configuration Client

Configuring the language of Configuration Client

You configure the language of your Configuration Client independently of the language of your

Windows installation.

To configure the language:

1.

On the Settings menu, click Options....

The Options dialog box is displayed.

2.

In the Language of the Configuration Client: list, select the desired language.

If you select Default system language, the language of your Windows installation is used.

3.

Click OK.

The language is switched after the next restart of the application.

Configuring the language of Operator Client

You configure the language of your Operator Client independently of the language of your

Windows installation and of your Configuration Client. This step is performed in the

Configuration Client.

To configure the language:

1.

Click User Groups > . Click the User Group Properties tab.

2.

In the Language: list, select the desired language.

3.

Click to save the settings.

4.

Click to activate the configuration.

Restart Operator Client.

Adding a new license

Main window

Have the Activation Letter at hand that you received from Bosch.

To add a new license:

1.

On the Tools menu, click License Manager....

The License Manager dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the software package that you want to activate.

3.

Click Activate.

The License Activation dialog box is displayed.

4.

Type the License Activation Key that you find in the Activation Letter.

5.

Click Activate.

The software package is activated.

6.

Repeat this procedure for each software package that you want to activate.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

20 en | Getting started

5.7

Bosch Video Management System

Working offline

When Operator Client is disconnected from a Management Server, a respective overlay icon is

displayed in the Logical Tree on the disconnected Management Server. You can continue

working with Operator Client even if the disconnection lasts longer, but some functions are not available.

If the connection to the Management Server is reestablished, a respective overlay icon is displayed.

If a new configuration on a Management Server has been activated, a respective icon is displayed in the Logical Tree on the icon of the affected Management Server and a dialog box is displayed for some seconds. Accept or refuse the new configuration.

If your Operator Client instance is scheduled to log off at a specific point in time, this logoff occurs even when the connection to the Management Server is not reestablished at this point in time.

When disconnected from a Management Server, all devices are indicated with the icon. The state overlay of a device in the Logical Tree or on a map when Operator Client is disconnected from the Management Server

The following functions are not available in Operator Client when disconnected from the

Management Server for this connection:

Handling alarms, Alarm List

– Indication of recording

– Indication of state changes

– PTZ control locking

– Analog monitor group

– Scripts

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6 Configuring devices

Configuring devices | en 21

Main window > Devices

This chapter provides information on how to configure the devices in your system.

Changing the Device Tree impacts other pages of the Configuration Client:

– Maps and Structure

With the devices of the Device Tree you create a user defined structure called Logical

Tree. Hence, if you remove a device from the Device Tree, this device is automatically

removed from the Logical Tree. But adding a device to the Device Tree does not add this device to the Logical Tree.

– Cameras and Recording

All cameras of the Device Tree are available in the Camera Table and the Recording

Tables. You cannot modify DiBos or Bosch Allegiant cameras.

– Events

All devices of the Device Tree are available in the corresponding Event Tables.

– User Groups

You can reduce the functional range of the devices on several permission pages (per user group or Enterprise Account).

You can configure the following devices:

– Bosch Video Streaming Gateway devices

– ONVIF encoders

– Mobile video services

Video Recording Manager devices

Primary NVR and Failover NVR

– Encoders

– Encoders with local storage or live only

– Decoders

– DiBos systems

– Analog matrices

– Workstations

– Communication devices

ATM and POS devices

Virtual inputs

– I/O modules

Network monitoring system

– CCTV keyboard

Analog monitor groups

1.

Click to save the settings.

2.

Click to undo the last setting.

3.

Click to activate the configuration.

See also

Adding multiple Management Server computers, 23

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

22 en | Configuring devices

Detecting NVRs, their recorded encoders, and decoders, 24

Detecting VRM devices, 25

Configuring NVRs, 25

Adding a device, 29

Configuring an encoder / decoder, 32

Configuring a decoder for use with a CCTV keyboard, 32

Configuring multiple encoders / decoders, 33

Configuring a DiBos system, 34

Configuring a Bosch Allegiant device, 34

Configuring a startup Command Script, 34

Changing the network address of a workstation, 34

Enabling Forensic Search on a workstation, 35

Assigning an analog monitor group to a workstation, 35

Configuring an analog monitor group, 35

Configuring a communication device, 36

Configuring a peripheral device, 36

Configuring network monitoring, 36

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (workstation), 37

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (decoder), 37

Configuring an I/O module, 37

Configuring an Allegiant CCL emulation, 38

Adding a VRM device with iSCSI storage, 38

Configuring an iSCSI device, 38

Adding a LUN, 40

Formatting a LUN, 40

Adding a local storage or live only device, 40

Adding a Video Streaming Gateway device, 41

Adding a Bosch camera to a VSG, 42

Adding an ONVIF camera to a VSG, 42

Configuring multicast for VSG, 43

Switching on VSG recording, 43

NVR & Decoder Scan dialog box, 97

Failover NVR Manager dialog box, 98

IP Device Configuration dialog box, 98

Set IP Addresses dialog box, 99

Set Display Names dialog box, 99

NVRs / Failover NVRs / Redundant NVRs page, 99

Encoders / Decoders page, 128

DiBos page, 103

Matrix Switches page, 105

Workstation page, 106

Analog Monitor Groups page, 108

Communication Devices page, 111

POS + ATM page, 113

Virtual Inputs page, 114

SNMP page, 115

CCTV Keyboards page, 116

I/O Modules page, 117

Bosch Video Management System

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.1

Configuring devices | en 23

Adding multiple Management Server computers

Main window > Devices > Enterprise System > Server List

You perform this task of adding multiple Management Server computers in Configuration

Client on the Enterprise Management Server.

You add multiple Management Server computers to configure a Bosch VMS Enterprise System. A

user of Operator Client can log on with user name of a member an Enterprise User Group to get simultaneous access to these Management Server computers.

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

Operating permissions are configured on the Enterprise Management Server in

Groups, Enterprise User Group tab.

User

Device permissions are configured on each Management Server in

Enterprise Access tab.

To add:

1.

Click Add Server.

User Groups,

The Add Server dialog box is displayed.

2.

Type in a display name for the server and the network address (DNS name or IP address).

3.

Click OK.

4.

Repeat these steps until you have added all desired Management Server computers.

P The Management Server computers for your Enterprise System are configured.

Now configure the desired Enterprise User Groups and the Enterprise Access.

The following screenshot shows an example:

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

24 en | Configuring devices Bosch Video Management System

6.2

See also

Server List page, 96

Enterprise System, 188

User Groups page, 172

Detecting NVRs, their recorded encoders, and decoders

Main window > box

Devices > NVR & Decoder Scan > NVR & Decoder Scan dialog

You scan the network to detect the following devices:

NVRs

– Decoders

– Encoders

The system automatically adds a default analog monitor group with the detected decoders assigned. This analog monitor group is added below .

When you scan the network for the first time, NVRs and decoders are automatically assigned to the system.

You must manually assign detected encoders to NVRs.

To avoid conflicts with duplicate IP addresses you start the initial device scan. This is useful when you integrate new devices in your network which have duplicate IP addresses or the factory default IP address (192.168.0.1). You cannot perform this initial device scan successfully with devices that are password protected.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.3

6.4

Configuring devices | en 25

When you want to add devices that are not members of the same subnet, perform the initial device scan.

To start the initial device scan:

1.

On the Hardware menu, click Initial Device Scan....

The Initial Device Scan dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click a cell to change the desired address. For changing multiple devices, select the desired rows. You can select multiple devices by pressing the CTRL- or the SHIFT-key.

Then right-click the selected rows and click Set IP Addresses... or click Set Subnet

Mask... to change the corresponding values.

You must enter the correct subnet mask before changing an IP address.

3.

Click OK.

To scan the network:

1.

Click .

The NVR & Decoder Scan dialog box is displayed and all available NVRs, decoders, and encoders are detected.

The detected decoders are listed in the Decoders list and assigned automatically to the

tree item of the Device Tree. If no analog monitor group has already been created,

the detected decoders are added to a new analog monitor group under > .

If you do not want to use a decoder or an NVR, remove the item manually: right-click the item and click Remove.

The detected NVRs are assigned automatically to the tree item of the Device Tree.

2.

In the Unassigned Encoders list, select an encoder and drag it to an NVR in the Assigned

Encoders and NVRs list. The encoder’s cameras are recorded on the selected NVR.

3.

Repeat the above step for every detected encoder that you want to be part of your system. Encoders that you do not drag to an NVR, are completely invisible in Bosch Video

Management System.

4.

Click Next >.

If required, a dialog box is displayed for changing the device names of the connected devices of the detected IP devices to be used for display. Bosch Video Management

System names the devices with default names. If desired, you can use the existing names of the devices.

5.

Make the required settings. For changing the displayed device names of a complete column at once, right-click a column with check boxes and click Select Column.

6.

Click Finish.

Detecting VRM devices

Configuring NVRs

Main window > Devices

This chapter provides information on how to configure NVRs in your system.

Primary NVRs record the images of all assigned encoders and IP cameras connected to your

system.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

26 en | Configuring devices

6.4.1

Bosch Video Management System

A Failover NVR is a server that takes over the tasks of a failing Primary NVR. The Failover NVR

starts recording as soon as the Primary NVR fails. A Failover NVR cannot have any encoders directly assigned. A Failover NVR can take over the tasks of a Primary NVR even when

Management Server is not available.

You can assign maximum one Failover NVR to a Primary NVR and you can assign multiple

Primary NVRs to one Failover NVR.

When the Primary NVR works correctly again, the Primary NVR takes back his tasks from the

Failover NVR automatically. The Failover NVR stops recording some seconds after the Primary

NVR has started recording. The recordings of the down time stay on the Failover NVR.

A Redundant NVR performs the same recording tasks as the assigned Primary NVR. A Primary

NVR can have maximum one Redundant NVR assigned. On a Redundant NVR, you cannot configure the recording and event settings of the assigned devices independently from the

Primary NVR. A Redundant NVR just retrieves video and audio streams and forwards them to a database. When you change the recording settings on the Primary NVR, these settings are synchronized on the Redundant NVR.

If you remove an NVR from the Device Tree, the recordings of this NVR are not deleted. You can retrieve them by activating a previous configuration version containing this NVR.

You can assign a Failover NVR to a Redundant NVR. When the Redundant NVR fails, the

Failover NVR takes over its tasks, i.e. it acts like a Redundant NVR.

The recordings are performed in different modes depending on your configuration:

– Continuous recording

– Pre-event recording

– Motion recording

– Alarm recording

1.

Click to save the settings.

2.

Click to undo the last setting.

3.

Click to activate the configuration.

Configuring a Primary NVR

Main window > Devices > Expand

Assign a Failover NVR

> Expand

You can perform the following tasks to configure a selected NVR:

– Configure video and audio storage

>

– Configure backup

To configure an NVR:

1.

Click the Global Settings tab to assign a Failover NVR to this NVR. The Switch over to: list contains only NVRs that have been configured as Failover NVRs.

2.

Click the Disk Storage tab to configure the storage settings of the selected NVR.

3.

Click the Camera Storage tab to define minimum and maximum storage times, manage protected recordings, and to optionally schedule the backup of the assigned cameras. If scheduled backups are desired, you must first create a Task Schedule in Schedules.

Related Topics

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.4.2

Switching an NVR to a Failover NVR

6.4.3

6.4.4

Configuring devices | en 27

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

To configure a Failover NVR you must first change an NVR to a Failover NVR.

To switch an NVR:

1.

Right-click an NVR. This NVR must not have any encoders assigned.

2.

Click Act as Failover NVR. The NVR is moved to the Failover NVRs node.

Switching an NVR to a Redundant NVR

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

To configure a Redundant NVR you must first change an NVR to a Redundant NVR.

To switch an NVR:

1.

Right-click an NVR. This NVR must not have any encoders assigned.

2.

Click Act as Redundant. The NVR is moved to the Redundant NVRs node.

Configuring a Failover NVR

6.4.5

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Before you can configure a Failover NVR you must switch a Primary NVR to a Failover NVR.

After having configured a Failover NVR, you assign it to one or multiple NVRs.

You can perform the following tasks to configure a selected Failover NVR:

– Configuring video and audio storage

– Assigning NVRs

To configure a Failover NVR:

1.

Click the Global Settings tab to display network settings of the selected Failover NVR.

2.

Click the Disk Storage tab to configure the storage settings of the selected Failover NVR.

3.

Click the Assigned NVRs tab to add or remove NVRs to the selected Failover NVR.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring a Redundant NVR

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Before you can configure a Redundant NVR you must switch a Primary NVR to a Redundant

NVR.

After having configured a Redundant NVR, you assign it to one or multiple NVRs.

You can perform the following tasks to configure a selected Redundant NVR:

– Configuring video and audio storage

– Assigning NVRs

To configure a Redundant NVR:

1.

Click the Global Settings tab to display network settings of the selected Redundant NVR.

2.

Click the Disk Storage tab to configure the storage settings of the selected Redundant

NVR.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

28 en | Configuring devices

6.4.6

Bosch Video Management System

3.

Click the Camera Storage tab to configure the camera settings of the selected Redundant

NVR. This page is only available, if on the Assigned NVR page the Backup option is checked.

4.

Click the Assigned NVR tab to add or remove NVRs to the selected Redundant NVR

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Assigning NVRs to Failover NVRs

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

For an NVR, you can configure a Failover NVR that takes over the tasks of the NVR if it fails.

Ensure that an NVR is switched to a Failover NVR.

You can easily configure several NVRs to have a Failover NVR assigned.

To assign an NVR to a Failover NVR:

1.

Expand .

2.

Select an NVR as required.

3.

Click the Global Settings tab.

4.

In the Failover NVR list, select the required Failover NVR.

To assign multiple NVRs to a Failover NVR:

1.

Expand .

2.

Select the desired Failover NVR.

3.

Click the Assigned NVRs tab.

4.

In the Time [h] column, select the required NVRs.

5.

Click Add NVR.

Each added Primary NVR has the selected Failover NVR assigned.

Assigning NVRs to a Redundant NVR 6.4.7

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

You can only assign one NVR to a Redundant NVR. If you select a Primary NVR that already has

been assigned to another Redundant NVR, the assignment to the previous Redundant NVR is removed.

Ensure that an NVR is switched to a Redundant NVR.

To assign a Primary NVR to a Redundant NVR:

1.

Select the desired Redundant NVR.

2.

Click the Assigned NVR tab.

The table displays all Primary NVRs.

3.

In the first column, click to check the desired NVR.

Each checked primary NVR has the selected Redundant NVR assigned.

4.

In the Backup column, make the desired setting.

When cleared, the Camera Storage tab becomes active.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.4.8

Displaying information on an NVR

6.4.9

Configuring devices | en 29

Main window > Devices> Expand > Expand

You can display the following information on an NVR:

>

– Network related information

– Disk usage statistics and the available disk space on the NVR.

To display information on an NVR:

4 Click the Disk Storage tab to view information on the selected NVR.

Changing the network address of an NVR / Failover NVR / Redundant NVR

Main window > or

Devices> Expand > Expand

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand

6.5

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

To change the IP address of an NVR / Failover NVR / Redundant NVR:

1.

Right-click / / and click Change network address.

The Network address dialog box is displayed.

2.

Change the entry in the field according to your requirements.

Adding a device

Main window > Devices

You add the following devices to the Device Tree manually because these devices are not

added by a network scan:

– ONVIF cameras

– Video Streaming Gateway devices

– DiBos system

– Analog matrix

For adding a Bosch Allegiant device, you need a valid Allegiant configuration file.

– Bosch Video Management System workstation

A workstation must have the Operator Client software installed.

– Communication device

Bosch ATM/POS Bridge, ATM device

Virtual input

Network monitoring device

– CCTV keyboard

Analog monitor group

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

30 en | Configuring devices Bosch Video Management System

– I/O module

– Allegiant CCL emulation

Decoders, encoders, NVRs including VIDOS NVRs, and VRMs are detected by the network

scan.

Notice!

i

After having added a device, click to save the settings.

To add a DiBos system:

1.

Right-click .

2.

Click Add DiBos/BRS Recorder.

The Add DiBos/BRS System dialog box is displayed.

3.

Enter the appropriate values.

4.

Click Scan.

The DiBos system is added to your system.

5.

In the displayed message box, click OK to confirm.

To add a Bosch Allegiant device:

1.

Right-click and click Add Allegiant.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the appropriate Allegiant configuration file and click OK.

The Bosch Allegiant device is added to your system.

Note: You can add only one Bosch Allegiant matrix.

To add a Bosch Video Management System workstation:

1.

Right-click and click Add Workstation.

The Add Workstation dialog box is displayed.

2.

Enter the appropriate value click OK.

The workstation is added to your system.

To add an analog monitor group:

1.

Expand , right-click and click Add Monitor Group.

The Create New Analog Monitor Group dialog box is displayed.

If you already have performed a network scan, and decoders have been detected, there is already a default analog monitor group available with all detected decoders assigned.

2.

Make the appropriate settings.

3.

Click OK.

The analog monitor group is added to your system.

To add a communication device:

1.

Expand , right-click and click the required command.

The appropriate dialog box is displayed.

2.

Enter the appropriate settings.

3.

Click OK.

The communication device is added to your system.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System i

Configuring devices | en 31

To add a peripheral device:

1.

Expand , right-click and click the required command.

The appropriate dialog box is displayed.

2.

Enter the appropriate settings.

3.

Click OK.

The peripheral device is added to your system.

To add a virtual input:

1.

Expand , click .

The corresponding page is displayed.

2.

Click Add Inputs.

A row is added to the table.

3.

Make the appropriate settings.

4.

Click Add .

The virtual input is added to your system.

To add a network monitoring device:

1.

Expand , right-click and click Add SNMP.

The Add SNMP dialog box is displayed.

2.

Type a name for the SNMP device.

The network monitoring device is added to your system.

To add a CCTV keyboard:

1.

Expand , click .

The corresponding page is displayed.

2.

Click Add Keyboard.

A row is added to the table.

3.

Make the appropriate settings.

The keyboard is added to your system.

To add an I/O module:

1.

Expand , right-click and click Add New ADAM Device.

The Add ADAM dialog box is displayed.

2.

Type the IP address of the device.

If you want to skip the currently selected device and jump to the next one, click Skip.

3.

Select the device type.

The corresponding page is displayed.

4.

Click the Inputs tab to change the display names of the inputs if required.

5.

Click the Name tab to change the display names of the Relays if required.

Notice!

You can also perform a scan for ADAM devices (Scan for ADAM Devices). The IP addresses of the devices are detected. If available the device type is preselected. You must confirm this selection.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

32 en | Configuring devices

6.6

Bosch Video Management System

To add an Allegiant CCL emulation:

1.

Expand , click .

The Allegiant CCL Emulation tab is displayed.

2.

Click to check Enable Allegiant CCL Emulation.

3.

Make the required settings.

The Allegiant CCL emulation service is started on the Management Server.

Configuring an encoder / decoder

To configure an encoder:

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand > Expand

Main window > or

Devices > Expand

Main window >

To configure a decoder:

Devices > >

> Expand >

> i

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

To configure an encoder or a decoder:

4 Make the appropriate settings on the tab pages of the encoder or decoder.

See the Online Help for the pages for details.

Notice!

IP devices can be connected that do not have all configuration pages that are described here.

Configuring a decoder for use with a CCTV keyboard 6.7

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Perform the following steps to configure a VIP XD decoder that is connected to a CCTV keyboard.

To configure a decoder:

1.

Click the appropriate decoder which is used for connecting a CCTV keyboard.

2.

Click the Periphery tab.

3.

Ensure that the following settings are applied:

– Serial port function: Transparent

– Baud rate: 19200

– Stop bits: 1

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.8

i

Configuring devices | en 33

– Parity check: None

– Interface mode: RS232

Half-duplex mode: Off

Configuring multiple encoders / decoders

Main window

You can modify the following properties of multiple encoders and decoders at once:

– Display names

– IP addresses

– Firmware versions

Notice!

Changing the IP address of an IP device can make it unreachable.

To configure multiple IP addresses:

1.

On the Hardware menu, click IP Device Configuration.... The IP Device Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the required devices. You can select multiple devices by pressing the CTRL- or the

SHIFT-key.

3.

Right-click the selected devices and click Set IP Addresses.... The Set IP Addresses dialog box is displayed.

4.

In the Start with: field, type the first IP address.

5.

Click Calculate. In the End with: field, the last IP address of the range for the selected devices is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

7.

In the IP Device Configuration... dialog box, click Apply.

The new IP addresses are updated in the selected devices.

To configure multiple display names:

1.

On the Hardware menu, click IP Device Configuration.... The IP Device Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the required devices. Multiple selection is possible by pressing the SHIFT key.

3.

Right-click the selected devices and click Set Display Names... The Set Display Names dialog box is displayed.

4.

In the Start with: field, type the first string.

5.

Click Calculate. In the End with: field, the last string of the range for the selected devices is displayed.

6.

Click OK.

7.

In the IP Device Configuration... dialog box, click Apply.

The calculated names are updated in the selected devices.

To update firmware for multiple devices:

1.

On the Hardware menu, click IP Device Configuration.... The IP Device Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select the required devices.

3.

Click Update Firmware.

4.

Select the file containing the update.

5.

Click OK.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Bosch Video Management System 34 en | Configuring devices

6.9

Configuring a DiBos system

6.10

i

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Notice!

You do not configure the DiBos system itself but only the Bosch Video Management System related properties.

To scan for new DiBos devices:

4

Right-click and click Scan for DiBos Devices.

The DiBos system is scanned for new devices and they are added.

To remove an item:

1.

Click the Cameras tab, the Relays tab, or the Inputs tab.

2.

Right-click an item and click Remove. The item is removed.

To rename a DiBos device:

1.

Right-click a DiBos device and click Rename.

2.

Type the new name for the item.

Configuring a Bosch Allegiant device

6.11

6.12

Main window > Devices > Expand >

You do not configure the Bosch Allegiant device itself but only the Bosch Video Management

System related properties.

To assign an output to an encoder:

1.

Click the Outputs tab.

2.

In the Usage column, click Digital Trunk in the desired cells.

3.

In the Encoder column, select the desired encoder.

Adding an input to a Bosch Allegiant device:

1.

Click the Inputs tab.

2.

Click Add Inputs. A new row is added to table.

3.

Type the required settings in the cells.

Deleting an input:

1.

Click the Inputs tab.

2.

Click the required table row.

3.

Click Delete Input. The row is deleted from the table.

Configuring a startup Command Script

See Configuring a startup Command Script, 67.

Changing the network address of a workstation

Main window > Devices > Expand

To change the IP address:

1.

Right-click and click Change Network Address.

The Change Network Address dialog box is displayed.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.13

2.

Change the entry in the field according to your requirements.

Enabling Forensic Search on a workstation

Configuring devices | en 35

6.14

Main window > Devices > Expand >

You must enable Forensic Search on a workstation.

> Settings page

Note:

Enable video content analysis on each encoder. Use the VCA page of the encoder in the Device

Tree.

To enable Forensic Search:

4 Click to select the Enable Forensic Search check box.

Assigning an analog monitor group to a workstation

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Analog Monitor Groups page

You assign an analog monitor group to a Bosch Video Management System workstation. In the

Options dialog box, you can configure that all workstations can control analog monitor groups regardless of the setting here.

To assign an analog monitor group:

4 In the Assigned Analog Monitor Groups column, select the check box.

Configuring an analog monitor group 6.15

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Caution!

You cannot control an analog monitor group from within Operator Client when the connection to the Management Server is lost or when Operator Client with Enterprise System is used.

You configure the monitors in an analog monitor group logically in rows and columns. This

arrangement does not have to meet the physical arrangement of the monitors.

To configure an analog monitor group:

1.

In the Name: field, type a name for the analog monitor group.

2.

In the Columns: and Rows: fields, enter the desired values.

3.

Drag each available decoder to an analog monitor image on the right.

The logical number of the decoder is displayed as a black number on the monitor image and the color of this image changes.

If no decoder is available, unassign a decoder from another analog monitor group or repeat network scan.

4.

Click the Advanced Configuration tab.

5.

Change the logical numbers of the assigned decoders as required. If you enter an already used number, a message box is displayed.

6.

Click Quad View to enable quad view for this decoder.

Note:

We do not recommend configuring quad view for H.264 cameras.

7.

In the Initial Camera column, select the desired camera.

8.

In the OSD related columns, select the desired options.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

36 en | Configuring devices

6.16

Adding a monitor wall

Main window >

Bosch Video Management System

Devices > Right-click > Click Add Monitor Wall

6.17

Main window > Maps and Structure

After having added the monitor wall, the user of Operator Client can control this monitor wall.

The user can change the monitor layout and assign encoders to monitors.

To add:

1.

Select the desired decoder.

2.

If required, enter the maximum number of monitors and configure thumbnails.

3.

Click .

4.

Click Maps and Structure.

5.

Drag the monitor wall to the Logical Tree.

6.

If required, configure the access to the monitor wall with corresponding user group permissions.

See also

Add Monitor Wall dialog box, 110

Configuring a communication device

6.18

Main window > Devices > Expand

To configure a communication device:

1.

> Expand

Click the required device: or .

2.

Make the appropriate settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring a peripheral device

Main window > Devices > Expand

To configure a peripheral device:

> Expand > or

4 Change the required settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring network monitoring 6.19

Main window >

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Devices> Expand

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.20

Configuring devices | en 37

To configure the SNMP trap receiver:

1.

Click to display the SNMP Trap Receiver page.

2.

Make the required settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (workstation)

6.21

Main window > Devices> Expand >

To configure a CCTV keyboard connected to a workstation:

1.

Click the Settings tab.

2.

In the Keyboard Serial Port Settings field, make the required settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (decoder)

Main window > Devices> Expand >

To configure a CCTV keyboard connected to a decoder:

1.

In the Connection column, click a cell, and select the appropriate decoder.

You can also select a workstation, if the CCTV keyboard is connected to it.

A workstation must be configured on the page.

2.

In the Connection Settings field, make the required settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring an I/O module 6.22

Main window > Devices> Expand > Expand

To configure an I/O module:

1.

Click the ADAM tab.

2.

In the ADAM type: list, select the appropriate device type.

>

Caution!

Do not change the device type if not really necessary.

If you for example change the device type to a type with less inputs, all configuration data for the removed inputs get lost.

1.

Click the Inputs tab.

2.

In the Name column, change the display name of an input if required.

3.

Click the Relays tab.

4.

In the Relays column, change the name of a relay if required.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

38 en | Configuring devices

6.23

Configuring an Allegiant CCL emulation

Bosch Video Management System

6.24

Main window > Devices> Expand >

To use the CCL commands you need the CCL User Guide. This manual is available in the

Online Product Catalog in the document section of each LTC Allegiant Matrix.

Allegiant CCL commands supported in Bosch VMS, 196 lists the CCL commands supported in

Bosch Video Management System.

To configure an Allegiant CCL emulation:

1.

Click Enable Allegiant CCL Emulation.

2.

Configure the communication settings as required.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Adding a mobile video service

Main window > Devices >Right-click > Click Add Mobile Video Service

You can add a transcoding service to your Bosch Video Management System. The following devices can receive video data from Bosch Video Management System:

– iPad (via App)

– iPhone (via App)

To add:

1.

Type in the URI of your mobile device.

2.

Click OK.

P The configured device can now receive live and playback video data from your Bosch

Video Management System.

See also

Add Mobile Video Service dialog box, 119

Adding a VRM device with iSCSI storage 6.25

6.26

Main window > Devices >

In your network, you need a VRM service running on a computer, and an iSCSI device.

Caution!

When you add an iSCSI device with no targets and LUNs configured, start a default configura-

tion and add the IQN of each encoder to this iSCSI device.

When you add an iSCSI device with targets and LUNs pre-configured, add the IQN of each encoder to this iSCSI device.

See Configuring an iSCSI device, 38 for details.

Configuring an iSCSI device

After adding VRM devices, iSCSI devices, and encoders, perform the following tasks to ensure

that video data of encoders is stored on the iSCSI devices or video data can be retrieved from these iSCSI devices:

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuring devices | en 39

Execute the default configuration to create LUNs on each target of the iSCSI device.

This step is optional. You do not need to perform this step on an iSCSI device with LUNs pre-configured.

– Scan the iSCSI device to add the targets and LUNs to the Device Tree after default configuration.

Note:

Not all iSCSI devices support the default configuration and automatic IQN mapping.

To perform the default configuration of an iSCSI device:

1.

Expand the appropriate VRM device , click the appropriate iSCSI device

2.

Click the Default Configuration tab.

LUNs are created on the targets of the iSCSI device.

3.

Format these LUNs.

See Formatting a LUN, 40.

4.

When the process has finished, click to save the settings.

5.

.

Click to activate the configuration.

To scan the iSCSI device:

1.

Expand the appropriate VRM device

2.

, click the appropriate iSCSI device

Right-click and click Scan ISCSI Device.

The process is started.

Targets and LUNs are detected and added to the Device Tree below the iSCSI node.

.

3.

Click to save the settings.

4.

Click to activate the configuration.

To perform IQN mapping:

1.

Expand the appropriate VRM device

2.

, click the appropriate iSCSI device

Right-click and click Map IQNs.

The iqn-Mapper dialog box is displayed and the process is started.

.

are evaluated and their The encoders that are assigned to the selected VRM device

IQNs are added to this iSCSI device.

3.

4.

Click to save the settings.

Click to activate the configuration.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

40 en | Configuring devices

6.27

Adding a LUN

6.28

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Usually the network scan adds the desired iSCSI devices with their targets and LUNs

automatically. If your network scan did not work correctly or you want to configure your iSCSI device offline before it is actually integrated into your network, you configure a target in your iSCSI device and on this target you configure one or more LUNs.

To configure:

1.

Right-click and click Add Target.

The Add Target dialog box is displayed.

2.

Enter the desired target number and click Ok.

The target is added.

3.

Click the new target.

The LUNs page is displayed.

4.

Click Add.

The Add LUN dialog box is displayed.

5.

Enter the desired LUN number and click Ok.

The LUN is added as a new table row.

Repeat this step for each desired LUN.

Notes:

– To remove a LUN, click Remove.

The video data remains on this LUN.

– To format a LUN, click Format.

All data on this LUN is removed!

Formatting a LUN

i

Main window > Devices > Expand

You format a LUN to prepare it for the first use.

> Expand > Expand >

Notice!

All data on the LUN is lost after formatting.

To configure:

1.

On the LUNs page, select the desired LUN and, in the Format column, click to check.

2.

Click Format LUN.

3.

Read the displayed message carefully and confirm the message if desired.

The selected LUN is formatted. All data on this LUN is lost.

Adding a local storage or live only device 6.29

Main window >

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Devices >

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System or

Configuring devices | en 41

6.30

Main window > Devices >

You can add Bosch or ONVIF encoders with local storage or live only encoders.

To add a local storage:

1.

Right-click and click Scan Local Storage Encoders.

The Bosch VMS Scan Wizard is displayed.

2.

Assign the device.

If required assign multiple devices.

3.

Click Next >>.

The next step of the wizard is displayed.

4.

Click Finish.

The device is connected to your Bosch Video Management System.

To add a Bosch live only device:

1.

Right-click and click Scan live-only Encoders.

The Bosch VMS Scan Wizard is displayed.

2.

Assign the device.

If required assign multiple devices.

3.

Click Next >>.

The next step of the wizard is displayed.

4.

Click Finish.

The device is connected to your Bosch Video Management System.

To add an ONVIF live only device:

1.

Right-click and click Scan live-only ONVIF Encoders.

The Bosch VMS Scan Wizard is displayed.

2.

Assign the device.

If required assign multiple devices.

3.

Click Next >>.

The next step of the wizard is displayed.

4.

Click Finish.

The device is connected to your Bosch Video Management System.

Adding a Video Streaming Gateway device

Main window > Devices Expand > Right-click > Click Add Streaming

Gateway > Edit Streaming Gateway dialog box

You add a VSG to the system to enable assigning and configuring cameras to this VSG.

To add a VSG:

1.

Make the required settings for your VSG device.

2.

Click Add.

P The VSG device is added to the system. The cameras assigned to this VSG are recorded.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

42 en | Configuring devices

6.31

See also

Video Streaming Gateway device page, 123

Adding a Bosch camera to a VSG

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

To add a camera:

1.

Select the desired cameras and click to add them to the VSG cameras list.

The Add/Edit dialog box is displayed.

Note: Select cameras of the same type, for example only Bosch cameras. Otherwise the

button is disabled.

2.

Type in user name and password and click Connect.

If the connection to the encoder is established successfully, the configuration settings in the Protocol settings group are active.

If you do not want to wait until the connection is established, click Skip.

3.

In the Type list, select Bosch RCP+.

4.

In the Video input and Stream and Protocol lists make the required settings.

5.

If required, type a name for the camera in the VSG Camera Name column.

6.

Click OK.

7.

Click .

See also

Add/Edit dialog box (Video Streaming Gateway), 124

Assignment tab (Video Streaming Gateway), 124

Adding an ONVIF camera to a VSG 6.32

Main window >

To add a camera:

1.

Devices > Expand

Select the desired cameras and click

The Add/Edit dialog box is displayed.

> Expand >

to add them to the VSG cameras list.

Note: Select cameras of the same type, for example only Bosch cameras. Otherwise the

button is disabled.

2.

Type in user name and password and click Connect.

If the connection to the encoder is established successfully, the configuration settings in the Protocol settings group are active.

If you do not want to wait until the connection is established, click Skip.

3.

In the Type list, select ONVIF.

4.

In the Stream and Token lists make the required settings.

5.

If required, type a name for the camera in the VSG Camera Name column.

6.

Click OK.

7.

Click .

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

6.33

See also

Add/Edit dialog box (Video Streaming Gateway), 124

Configuring multicast for VSG

6.34

Configuring devices | en 43

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

For each camera assigned to a Video Streaming Gateway device you can configure a multicast address with port.

To configure multicast:

1.

Click to enable multicast.

2.

Type in a valid multicast address and a port number.

3.

If required, configure continuous multicast streaming.

4.

Click .

See also

Multicast tabs (Video Streaming Gateway), 126

Switching on VSG recording

Main window >

To switch on:

Devices > Expand

1.

Click the Recording Profiles tab.

> Expand >

2.

Select the line of the camera, for which you want to switch on recording.

3.

In the Recording list, select On.

4.

Click .

Recording for this camera starts.

See also

Recording profiles tab (Video Streaming Gateway), 126

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

44 en | Configuring the structure

7

7.1

7.2

i

Configuring the structure

Bosch Video Management System

This chapter provides information on how to configure the Logical Tree and how to manage

resource files such as maps.

Notice!

If you move a group of devices in the Logical Tree, these devices loose their permission settings. You must set the permissions in the User Groups page again.

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available application windows:

Resource Manager dialog box, 151

Select Resource dialog box, 151

Sequence Builder dialog box, 151

Add Sequence dialog box, 152

Add Sequence Step dialog box, 153

Add URL dialog box, 153

Select Map for Link dialog box, 153

1.

Click to save the settings.

2.

Click to undo the last setting.

3.

Click to activate the configuration.

Configuring the Logical Tree

Adding a device to the Logical Tree

7.3

Main window >

To add a device:

Maps and Structure

4

Drag an item from the Device Tree to the required location in the Logical Tree.

You can drag a complete node with all sub-items from the Device Tree to the Logical Tree.

You can select multiple devices by pressing the CTRL- or the SHIFT-key.

Removing a tree item

7.4

Main window > Maps and Structure

To remove a tree item from the Logical Tree:

4 Right-click an item in the Logical Tree and click Remove. If the selected item has subitems, a message box is displayed. Click OK to confirm. The item is removed.

When you remove an item from a map folder of the Logical Tree, it is also removed from the map.

Managing resource files

Main window > or

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Maps and Structure >

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuring the structure | en 45 i

Main window > Alarms >

You can import resource files in the following formats:

DWF files (2 D, map resource files)

For use in Operator Client, these files are converted to a bitmap format.

– HTML files (map document files)

– MP3 (audio file)

TXT files (Command Scripts or camera sequences)

MHT files (Web archives)

– URL files (links to Web pages)

– WAV (audio file)

The imported resource files are added to a database. They are not linked to the original files.

Notice!

After each of the following tasks:

Click to save the settings.

To import a resource file:

1.

Click .

The Import Resource dialog box is displayed.

2.

Select one or more files.

3.

Click Open.

The selected files are added to the list.

If a file has already been imported, a message box is displayed.

If you decide to import an already imported file again, a new entry is added to the list.

To remove a resource file:

1.

Select a resource file.

2.

Click .

The selected resource file is removed from the list.

To rename a resource file:

1.

Select a resource file.

2.

Click .

3.

Enter the new name.

The original file name and creation date persists.

To replace the content of a resource file:

1.

Select a resource file.

2.

Click .

The Replace Resource dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select a file with the appropriate content and click Open.

The resource name persists, the original file name is exchanged with the new file name.

To export a resource file:

1.

Select a resource file.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

46 en | Configuring the structure

7.5

2.

Click .

A dialog box for selecting a directory is displayed.

3.

Select the appropriate directory and click OK.

The original file is exported.

Adding a Command Script

7.6

i i

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Maps and Structure

Before you can add a Command Script, you must have Command Script files imported or

created.

If required, see Configuring Command Scripts, 66 for details.

To add a Command Script file:

1.

Select a folder where you want to add the new Command Script.

2.

Click . The Select Client Script dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select a file in the list.

4.

Click OK.

A new Command Script is added under the selected folder.

Managing pre-configured camera sequences

Main window > Maps and Structure

You can perform the following tasks for managing camera sequences:

– Create a camera sequence

Add a step with a new dwell time to an existing camera sequence

– Remove a step from camera sequence

– Delete a camera sequence

Notice!

When the configuration is changed and activated, a camera sequence (pre-configured or automatic) usually is continued after restart of the Operator Client.

But in the following cases the sequence is not continued:

A monitor where the sequence is configured to be displayed has been removed.

The mode of a monitor (single/quad view) where the sequence is configured to be displayed has been changed.

The logical number of a monitor where the sequence is configured to be displayed is changed.

Notice!

After each of the following tasks:

Click to save the settings.

To create a camera sequence:

1.

In the Logical Tree, select a folder where you want to create the camera sequence.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

7.7

Configuring the structure | en 47

2.

Click .

The Sequence Builder dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the Sequence Builder dialog box, click

The Add Sequence dialog box is displayed.

4.

Enter the appropriate values.

.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

4 Click OK.

A new camera sequence is added.

To add a step with a new dwell time to a camera sequence:

1.

Select the desired camera sequence.

2.

Click Add Step.

The Add Sequence Step dialog box is displayed.

3.

Make the appropriate settings.

4.

Click OK.

A new step is added to the camera sequence.

To remove a step from a camera sequence:

4 Right-click the desired camera sequence and click Remove Step.

The step with the highest number is removed.

To delete a camera sequence:

1.

Select the desired camera sequence.

2.

Click . The selected camera sequence is removed.

Adding a camera sequence

7.8

Main window > Maps and Structure

You add a camera sequence to the root directory or to a folder of the Logical Tree.

To add a camera sequence:

1.

In the Logical Tree, select a folder where you want to add the new camera sequence.

2.

Click . The Sequence Builder dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the list, select a camera sequence.

4.

Click Add to Logical Tree. A new is added under the selected folder.

Adding a folder

Main window > Maps and Structure

To add a folder:

1.

Select a folder where you want to add the new folder.

2.

Click . A new folder is added under the selected folder.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

48 en | Configuring the structure

7.9

3.

Click to rename the folder.

4.

Type the new name and press ENTER.

Adding a map

7.10

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Maps and Structure

Before you can add a map, you must have map resource files imported.

To import a map resource file see Managing resource files, 44 for details.

To add a map:

1.

Ensure that the map resource file that you want to add has already been imported.

2.

Select a folder where you want to add the new map.

3.

Click . The Select Resource dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select a file in the list.

If the required files are not available in the list, click Manage... to display the Resource

Manager dialog box for importing files.

5.

Click OK.

A new map is added under the selected folder.

The map is displayed.

All devices within this folder are displayed in the upper left corner of the map.

Adding a link to another map

7.11

Main window > Maps and Structure

After you have added at least two maps, you can add a link on one map to the other so that the user can click from one map to a linked one.

To add a link:

1.

Click a map folder in the Logical Tree.

2.

Right-click the map and click Create Link.

The Select Map for Link dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the dialog box, click a map

4.

Click Select.

.

5.

Drag the item to the appropriate place on the map.

Assigning a map to a folder

Main window > Maps and Structure

Before you can assign maps, you must have map resource files imported.

If required, see Managing resource files, 44 for details.

To assign a map resource file:

1.

Right-click a folder and click Assign Map.

The Select Resource dialog box is displayed.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

7.12

Configuring the structure | en 49

2.

Select a map resource file in the list.

3.

Click OK. The selected folder is displayed as

The map is displayed in the map window.

.

All items within this folder are displayed in the upper left corner of the map.

Managing devices on a map

7.13

i

Main window > Maps and Structure

Before you can manage devices on a map you must add a map or assign a map to a folder and add devices to this folder.

Notice!

After each of the following tasks:

Click to save the settings.

To place items on a map:

1.

Select a map folder.

2.

Drag devices from the Device Tree to the map folder.

The devices of a map folder are located on the left upper corner of the map.

3.

Drag the items to the appropriate places on the map.

To remove an item in the Logical Tree only from the map:

1.

Right-click the item on the map and click Invisible.

The item is removed from the map.

The item remains in the Logical Tree.

2.

To make it visible again, right-click the device in the Logical Tree and click Visible In Map.

To remove an item from the map and from the Full Logical Tree:

4 Right-click the item in the Logical Tree and click Remove.

The item is removed from the map and from the Logical Tree.

To change the icon for the orientation of a camera:

4 Right-click the item, point to Change Image, and then click the appropriate icon.

The icon changes accordingly.

To change the color of an item:

4 Right-click the item and click to Change Color. Select the appropriate color.

The icon changes accordingly.

Adding a document

Main window > Maps and Structure

You can add text files, HTML files (including MHT files) or an URL file (containing an Internet

address) as documents. And you can add a link to another application.

Before you can add a document, you must have document files imported.

To import document files see Managing resource files, 44 for details.

To add a map document file:

1.

Ensure that the document file that you want to add has already been imported.

2.

Select a folder where you want to add the new document.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

50 en | Configuring the structure Bosch Video Management System

3.

Click . The Select Resource dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select a file in the list. If the required files are not available in the list, click Manage... to display the Resource Manager dialog box for importing files.

5.

Click OK. A new document is added under the selected folder.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

8 Configuring schedules

8.1

Configuring schedules | en 51

Main window > Schedules

There are two schedule types available:

Recording Schedules

Task Schedules

You can configure a maximum of 10 different Recording Schedules in the Recording Schedule

Table. In these segments the cameras can behave differently. For example, they can have different frame rate and resolution settings (to be configured in the Cameras and Recording page). In every point in time, exactly one Recording Schedule is valid. There are no gaps and no overlaps.

You configure Task Schedules for scheduling various events which can occur in your system (to

be configured in the Events page).

See glossary for definitions of Recording Schedules and Task Schedules.

The schedules are used in other pages of the Configuration Client:

Cameras and Recording page

Used to configure recording.

Events page

Used to determine when events cause logging, alarms, or execution of Command Scripts.

User Groups page

Used to determine when the members of a user group can log on.

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available application windows:

Recording Schedules page, 154

Task Schedules page, 154

4

Click to save the settings.

4

Click to undo the last setting.

4

Click to activate the configuration.

Configuring a Recording Schedule

Main window > Schedules

You can add exception days and holidays to any Recording Schedule. These settings override

the normal weekly settings.

The sequence of decreasing priority is: exception days, holidays, weekdays.

The maximum number of Recording Schedules is 10. The first three entries are configured by default. You can change these settings. Entries with the gray icon period configured.

Recording Schedules share the same weekdays.

Each Standard Task Schedule has its own weekdays patterns.

To configure a Recording Schedule:

1.

In the Recording Schedules tree, select a schedule.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual

do not have a time

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

52 en | Configuring schedules

8.2

Bosch Video Management System

2.

Click the Weekdays tab.

3.

In the Schedule Table field, drag the pointer to select the time periods for the selected schedule. The selected cells are displayed in the color of the selected schedule.

Notes:

– You can mark a time period on a weekday of a Recording Schedule with the color of another Recording Schedule.

Adding a Task Schedule

8.3

Main window >

To add a Task Schedule:

1.

Click Add.

Schedules

A new entry is added.

2.

Enter the appropriate name.

3.

Click Standard for a standard Task Schedule or Recurring for a recurring Task Schedule.

If you change the setting, a message box is displayed. Click OK if you want to change the schedule type.

.

A standard Task Schedule is displayed as , a recurring Task Schedule as

4.

Make the appropriate settings for the selected schedule.

Configuring a standard Task Schedule

8.4

Main window > Schedules

Each standard Task Schedule has its own weekdays patterns.

To configure a standard Task Schedule:

1.

In the Task Schedules tree, select a standard Task Schedule.

2.

Click the Weekdays tab.

3.

In the Schedule Table field, drag the pointer to select the time periods for the selected schedule.

Configuring a recurring Task Schedule

Main window > Schedules

Each recurring Task Schedule has its own day pattern.

To configure a recurring Task Schedule:

1.

In the Task Schedules tree, select a recurring Task Schedule

.

2.

In the Recurrence Pattern field, click the frequency with which you want the Task

Schedule to recur (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, Yearly) and then make the corresponding settings.

3.

In the Start date: list, select the appropriate start date.

4.

In the Day Pattern field, drag the pointer to select the appropriate time period.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

8.5

Removing a Task Schedule

8.6

!

Configuring schedules | en 53

Main window > > Select an item in the Task Schedules tree

To remove a Task Schedule:

1.

In the Task Schedules tree, select an item.

2.

Click Delete.

The Task Schedule is deleted. All items that are assigned to this schedule, are not

scheduled.

Adding holidays and exception days

Main window > Schedules

Caution!

You can configure empty exception days and holidays. Exception days and holidays replace the schedule of the corresponding week day.

Example:

Old configuration:

Weekday schedule configured to be active from 9:00 to 10:00

Exception day schedule configured to be active from 10:00 to 11:00

Result: activity from 10:00 to 11:00

Same behavior is valid for holidays.

You can add holidays and exception days to a Recording Schedule or to a Task Schedule.

Recording Schedules share the same holidays and exception days.

Each standard Task Schedule has its own holidays or exception days patterns.

To add holidays and exception days to a schedule:

1.

In the Recording Schedules or Task Schedules tree, select a schedule.

2.

Click the Holidays tab.

3.

Click Add.

The Add Holiday(s) dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select one or more holidays and click OK.

The selected holidays are added to the Schedule Table.

5.

Drag the pointer to select the appropriate time period (this is not possible for Recording

Schedules).

The selected cells are cleared and vice versa.

6.

Click the Exception Days tab.

7.

Click Add.

The Add Exception Day(s) dialog box is displayed.

8.

Select one or more special days and click OK.

The selected exception days are added to the Schedule Table.

9.

Drag the pointer to select the appropriate time period (this is not possible for Recording

Schedules).

The selected cells are cleared and vice versa.

The sorting order of the added holidays and exception days is chronological.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

54 en | Configuring schedules

8.7

Bosch Video Management System

Notes:

– You can mark a time period on a holiday or exception day of a Recording Schedule with the color of another Recording Schedule.

Removing holidays and exception days

8.8

Main window > Schedules

You can remove holidays and exception days from a Recording Schedule or a Task Schedule.

To remove holidays and exception days from a Task Schedule:

1.

In the Recording Schedules or Task Schedules tree, select a schedule.

2.

Click the Holidays tab.

3.

Click Delete.

The Select the holidays to delete dialog box is displayed.

4.

Select one or more holidays and click OK.

The selected holidays are removed from the Schedule Table.

5.

Click the Exception Days tab.

6.

Click Delete.

The Select the exception days to delete. dialog box is displayed.

7.

Select one or more exception days and click OK.

The selected exception days are removed from the Schedule Table.

Renaming a schedule

Main window >

To rename a schedule:

1.

In the Recording Schedules or Task Schedules tree, select an item.

2.

Click .

3.

Enter the new name and press ENTER. The entry is renamed.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

9

Configuring cameras and recording settings | en 55

Configuring cameras and recording settings

9.1

Main window > Cameras and Recording

This chapter provides information on how to configure the cameras in your Bosch Video

Management System.

You configure various camera properties and the recording settings.

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available application windows:

Cameras page, 156

Scheduled Recording Settings dialog box (only VRM and Local Storage), 158

Stream Quality Settings dialog box, 160

COM1, 143

PTZ Settings dialog box, 162

– Copy Recording Settings dialog box (NVR only)

4

Click to save the settings.

4

Click to undo the last setting.

4

Click to activate the configuration.

Copying and pasting in tables

You can configure many objects simultaneously within a Camera Table, an Event Configuration

Table, or an Alarm Configuration Table.

You can copy the configurable values of a table row in other rows:

– Copy all values of a row to other rows.

– Copy only one value of a row to another row.

– Copy the value of one cell to a complete column.

You can copy the values in two different ways:

– Copy into the clipboard and then paste.

– Direct copy and paste.

You can determine in which rows to paste:

– Copy in all rows.

– Copy in selected rows.

To copy and paste all configurable values of a row into another row:

1.

Right-click the row with the desired values and click Copy Row.

2.

Click the row heading of the row that you want to modify.

To select more than one row press the CTRL key and point to the other row headings.

3.

Right-click the table and click Paste.

The values are copied.

To copy and paste one value of a row into another row:

1.

Right-click the row with the desired values and click Copy Row.

2.

Right-click the cell that you want to modify, point to Paste Cell to, and click Current Cell.

The value is copied.

To copy all configurable values directly:

1.

Click the row heading of the row that you want to modify.

To select more than one row press the CTRL key and point to the other row headings.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

56 en | Configuring cameras and recording settings

9.2

9.3

Bosch Video Management System

2.

Right-click the row with the desired values, point to Copy Row to, and click Selected

Rows.

The values are copied.

To copy one value directly:

1.

Click the row heading of the row that you want to modify.

To select more than one row press the CTRL key and point to the other row headings.

2.

Right-click the cell with the desired value, point to Copy Cell to, and click Selection in

Column .

The value is copied.

To copy a value of a cell to all other cells in this column:

4 Right-click the cell with the desired value, point to Copy Cell to, and click Complete

Column.

The value is copied.

To duplicate a row:

4 Right-click the row and click Add Duplicated Row.

The row is added below with a new name.

Configuring stream quality settings

To add a stream quality settings entry:

1.

Click to add a new entry in the list.

2.

Type in a name.

To remove a stream quality settings entry:

4

Select an entry in the list and click

You cannot delete default entries.

To rename a stream quality settings entry:

1.

Select an entry in the list.

2.

Enter the new name in the Name: field.

to delete the entry.

You cannot rename default entries.

3.

Click OK.

To configure stream quality settings:

1.

Select an entry in the list.

2.

Make the appropriate settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring camera properties

Main window > Cameras and Recording >

To change camera properties:

1.

In the Camera column, click a cell and type a new name for the camera.

This name is displayed in all other places where cameras are listed.

2.

Only for VRM and Live Only: In the Stream 1 - Codec or Stream 2 - Codec column, select the appropriate codec for encoding stream 1 or stream 2.

3.

Only for VRM and Live Only: In the Live Video column, configure the quality of live display. For these devices, you can only set the live quality per camera, not per schedule.

4.

Make the appropriate settings in the other columns.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

9.4

9.5

Configuring cameras and recording settings | en 57

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring recording settings (only VRM and Local Storage)

To add a recording settings entry:

1.

Click to add a new entry in the list.

2.

Type in a name.

To remove a recording settings entry:

4

Select an entry in the list and click

You cannot delete default entries.

To rename a recording settings entry:

1.

Select an entry in the list.

2.

Enter the new name in the Name: field.

You cannot rename default entries.

3.

Click OK.

to delete the entry.

To configure recording settings:

1.

Select an entry in the list.

2.

Make the appropriate settings and click OK.

3.

Click or .

4.

In the Recording column, select the desired recording setting for each encoder.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring recording settings (only NVR)

Main window > Cameras and Recording > Click > Click a Recording Schedule tab (for example )

Before you configure the recording settings, configure the stream quality levels.

Note: For recording, ensure that the corresponding NVR is configured properly (Devices >

Expand > > Disk Storage tab).

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

58 en | Configuring cameras and recording settings

9.6

i i

Bosch Video Management System

Notice!

For all encoders, live view settings are also used for pre-event recording.

For encoders that support dual-streaming, the settings for live/pre-event recording, motion recording, and alarm recording are all configured independently.

For encoders that support only a single stream (e.g., the VideoJet 8004), live viewing and recording use the same stream. In this case, the recording settings take priority, so the live view uses the stream quality settings for continuous, motion, and alarm recording. You can enter a setting for live/pre-event only if continuous recording is disabled.

You can switch the live stream from stream 2 (default) to stream 1 for a workstation (Devi-

ces > Expand > > Settings tab > Override recording settings) or for an encoder.

This setting does not affect pre-event recording.

To configure recording settings:

1.

In the column of Continuous Recording, select the desired stream quality or disable continuous recording.

2.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

3.

In the column of Live/Pre-event Recording, select the desired stream quality or select stream 1.

4.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

5.

6.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

7.

In the Pre-event [s] column, click a cell and type the appropriate time.

8.

In the Post-event [s] column, click a cell and type the appropriate time.

9.

In the column of Alarm Recording, select the desired stream quality or disable alarm recording.

10.

In the column of Motion Recording, select the desired stream quality or disable motion recording.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

11. In the Pre-event [s] column, click a cell and type the appropriate time.

12. In the Post-event [s] column, click a cell and type the appropriate time.

Notice!

If pre-event time for motion recording and pre-event time for alarm recording differ, the higher value is used for both.

If the configured pre-event time would overlap a preceding alarm or motion recording, the pre-event recording starts after the preceding recording is finished.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring port settings

Main window > Devices > Expand

Interfaces tab > Periphery tab

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual

> Expand > Expand > >

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System or

9.7

Configuring cameras and recording settings | en 59

Main window >

Periphery tab or

Devices > Expand > Expand > > Interfaces tab >

Main window > Devices > > > Interfaces tab > Periphery tab

You can only configure port settings for an encoder where the control of the camera is available and activated.

When the encoder or PTZ camera is exchanged, the port settings are not retained. You must again configure them.

After a firmware update check the port settings.

To configure the port settings of an encoder:

4 Make the appropriate settings.

The settings are valid immediately after saving. You do not have to activate the configuration.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring PTZ camera settings

Main window > Cameras and Recording >

First configure the port settings of your PTZ camera before you can configure the PTZ camera settings. Otherwise the PTZ control is not working in this dialog box.

To configure a control of a camera:

1.

In the Camera Table, select the required encoder.

2.

To activate the control of a camera: In the column, select the check box.

3.

Click the button.

The dialog box for configuring PTZ settings is displayed.

4.

Make the appropriate settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

4 Click OK.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

60 en | Configuring events and alarms

10 Configuring events and alarms

Main window > or

Events

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Alarms

This chapter provides information on how to configure events and alarms in your system.

The available events are grouped beyond their corresponding devices.

In the Events page, you configure when an event in your Bosch Video Management System

triggers an alarm, executes a Command Script, and is logged.

Example (part of an Event Configuration Table):

This example means:

If the video signal of the selected camera gets lost, an alarm is triggered, the event is logged, and no script is executed.

In Alarms, you define how an alarm is displayed, and which cameras are displayed and recorded in case of an alarm.

Some system events are configured as alarms by default.

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available application windows:

Command Script Editor dialog box, 164

Create Compound Event / Edit Compound Event dialog box, 165

Select Script Language dialog box, 165

Alarm Settings dialog box, 168

Select Image Pane Content dialog box, 168

Alarm Options dialog box, 169

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

10.1

10.2

Configuring events and alarms | en 61

4

4

Click

Click

4

to save the settings.

to undo the last setting.

Click to activate the configuration.

Copying and pasting in tables

You can configure many objects simultaneously within a Camera Table, an Event Configuration

Table, or an Alarm Configuration Table with a few clicks.

For detailed information, see Copying and pasting in tables, 55.

Removing a table row

10.3

10.4

Main window > Alarms

You can only remove a table row that you or another user have added, i.e. you can delete

duplicated events or Compound Events.

Compound Events are located in the Event Tree under System Devices > Compound Events.

To remove a table row:

1.

Select the row.

2.

Click .

Managing resource files

For detailed information see:

Managing resource files, 44.

Configuring an event

Main window >

To configure an event:

Events

1.

In the tree, select an event or event state, for example System Devices > Authentication

> Operator Authentication Rejected.

The corresponding Event Configuration Table is displayed.

2.

In the Trigger Alarm - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the alarm is triggered.

Select one of the Recording Schedules or Task Schedules that you have configured in the

Schedules page.

3.

In the Log - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the event is logged.

4.

In the Script - Script column, click a cell and select an appropriate Command Script.

5.

In the Script - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the event triggers the start of the Command Script.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

62 en | Configuring events and alarms

10.5

Duplicating an event

10.6

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Events

You can duplicate an event to trigger different alarms for a particular event.

To duplicate an event:

1.

In the tree, select an event condition. The corresponding Event Configuration Table is displayed.

2.

Select a table row.

3.

Click . A new table row is added below. It has the default settings.

Logging user events

Main window > Events > Expand System Devices > User Actions

You can configure the logging behavior of several user actions for each available user group

individually.

Example:

To log user events:

1.

Select a user event to configure its logging behavior, e.g. Operator Logon.

The corresponding Event Configuration Table is displayed.

Each user group is displayed in the Device column.

2.

If available: In the Trigger Alarm - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the alarm that is supposed to notify the user is triggered.

You can select one of the Recording Schedules or Task Schedules that you have configured

in Schedules.

3.

In the Log - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the event is logged.

In the example, the Operator logon of the Admin Group and the Power User Group are not logged whereas the Operator logon of the Live User Group are logged during Day schedule.

Configuring user event buttons 10.7

Main window > Events

You can configure the user event buttons available in the Operator Client. You can configure that one or more user event buttons are not displayed in the Operator Client.

On the User Groups page, you configure that the user event buttons are only available in the

Operator Client of the corresponding user group.

To configure user event buttons:

1.

In the tree, select System Devices > Operator Client Event Buttons > Event Button

Pressed.

The corresponding Event Configuration Table is displayed.

2.

Select a user event button to configure its behavior.

3.

In the Trigger Alarm - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the alarm that is supposed to notify the user is triggered.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

10.8

Configuring events and alarms | en 63

4.

In the Log - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the event is logged.

Selecting Never makes the user event button unavailable in the Operator Client of all user groups that have the user event button permission.

5.

In the Script - Script column, click a cell and select an appropriate Command Script.

6.

In the Script - Schedule column, click a cell and select the appropriate schedule.

The schedule determines when the Command Script is executed.

Creating a Compound Event

Main window > Events >

You create a Compound Event. You can combine only state changes and their objects. Objects

can be for example schedules or devices. You can combine both the state changes and their objects with the Boolean expressions AND and OR.

Example: You combine the connection states of an IP camera and a decoder. The Compound

Event shall only occur when both the devices loose their connection. In this case you use the

AND operator for the two objects (the IP camera and the decoder) and for the two connection states Video Signal Lost and Disconnected.

To create a Compound Event:

1.

In the Event name: field, enter a name for the Compound Event.

2.

In the Event States: field, select an event state.

The available objects are displayed in the Objects: field.

3.

In the Objects: field select device as required.

The corresponding event and the selected devices are added to the Compound Event pane.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

64 en | Configuring events and alarms

10.9

Bosch Video Management System

4.

In the Compound Event: field, right-click a Boolean operation and change it where required.

A Boolean operation defines the combination of its immediate child elements.

5.

Click OK.

The new Compound Event is added to the Event Configuration Table. You find it in the

Event Tree below System Devices.

Editing a Compound Event

10.10

Main window > Events

You can change a previously created Compound Event.

To edit a Compound Event:

1.

In the Event Tree, expand System Devices > Compound Event State > Compound Event

is True.

2.

In the Event Configuration Table, in the Device column, right-click the required

Compound Event and click Edit.

The Edit Compound Event dialog box is displayed.

3.

Make the required changes.

4.

Click OK.

The Compound Event is changed.

Configuring an alarm

Main window > Alarms

Before configuring an alarm you must configure the trigger in Events.

To configure an alarm:

1.

In the tree, select an alarm, for example System Devices > Authentication > Operator

Authentication Rejected.

The corresponding Alarm Configuration Table is displayed.

2.

In the Priority column, click ... in a cell to type the alarm priority for the selected alarm

(100 is low priority, 1 is high priority).

In the Title column, click ... in a cell to type the title of the alarm to be displayed in Bosch

Video Management System, for example in the Alarm List.

In the Color column, click ... in a cell to display a dialog box for selecting a color for the alarm to be displayed in the Operator Client, for example in the Alarm List.

3.

In the 1-5 columns, click ... in a cell to display the Select Image Pane Content dialog box.

Make the required settings.

4.

In the Audio File column, click ... in a cell to display a dialog box for selecting an audio file that is played in case of an alarm.

5.

In the Alarm Options column, click ... in a cell to display the Alarm Options dialog box.

This dialog box allows you to configure the following settings for alarms:

– Cameras that start recording in case of an alarm

– Triggering PTZ commands in case of alarm

– Notifications that are sent in case of an alarm

– Workflow that has to be processed in case of an alarm

– Assigning cameras that are displayed in analog monitor groups in case of an alarm.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

10.11

Configuring settings for all alarms

Configuring events and alarms | en 65

Main window > Alarms

You can set the following alarm settings that are valid for this Management Server:

Number of Image panes per alarm

– Auto-clear time

– Manual alarm recording time

– Configure the behavior of all analog monitor groups

To configure all alarms:

1.

Click .

The Alarm Settings dialog box is displayed.

2.

Make the appropriate settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

4 Click OK.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

66 en | Configuring Command Scripts Bosch Video Management System

11

11.1

Configuring Command Scripts

This chapter describes how to configure Command Scripts. Command Scripts appear at various

places of Bosch Video Management System.

4

Click to save the settings.

4

Click to undo the last setting.

4

Click to activate the configuration.

Managing Command Scripts

Main window

You can create a Command Script using the following scripting languages:

– C#

– VB.Net

You cannot change the scripting language of an existing Command Script.

You can create a Client Script or a Server Script.

You can add scriptlets to every script.

To get help on entering code, click

Script API help is displayed.

in the Command Script Editor dialog box. The Bosch

To add a server scriptlet:

1.

On the Tools menu, click the Command Script Editor... command.

The Select Script Language dialog box is displayed if no Command Script was created yet.

2.

In the Script Language: list, select the required entry.

The Command Script Editor dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the left pane of the Command Script Editor dialog box, right-click ServerScript and click New Scriptlet.

A new scriptlet is added.

4.

Enter your code.

To add a client scriptlet

1.

On the Tools menu, click the Command Script Editor... command.

The Select Script Language dialog box is displayed if no Command Script was created yet.

2.

In the Script Language: list, select the required entry.

The Command Script Editor dialog box is displayed.

3.

In the left pane of the Command Script Editor dialog box, right-click ClientScript and click New Scriptlet.

A new scriptlet is added.

4.

Enter your code.

To delete a scriptlet:

1.

Open the Command Script Editor dialog box.

2.

Click the Server Script tab or the Client Script tab as required.

3.

In the Event Tree, right-click the required event and click

The scriptlet is removed.

.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

11.2

Configuring Command Scripts | en 67

To exit the Command Script Editor dialog box:

4

Click .

Configuring a Command Script to be started automatically

11.3

11.4

11.5

Main window > Alarms > or > Alarm Options column > ...

You configure a Client Command Script to be started in the following cases:

– Workstation starts up.

– User accepts an alarm.

To configure a Command Script at workstation startup:

See Configuring a startup Command Script, 34.

To configure a Command Script after user has accepted an alarm:

1.

Click the Workflow tab.

2.

In the Execute the following Client Script when alarm is accepted: list, select the desired Client Script.

This script is started as soon as a user accepts the selected alarm.

Importing a Command Script

Main window

You can import Command Scripts that have been developed on another computer. The file must

be written in the same scripting language that you used on your system.

To import a Command Script:

1.

On the Tools menu, click the Command Script Editor... command.

The Command Script Editor dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click .

The dialog box for opening a file is displayed.

3.

Select the required script file and click OK.

Exporting a Command Script

Main window

You can export Command Scripts that have been developed on another computer.

To export a Command Script:

1.

On the Tools menu, click the Command Script Editor... command.

The Command Script Editor dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click .

The dialog box for saving a file is displayed.

3.

Type the required script file name and click OK.

Configuring a startup Command Script

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Settings page

You configure a Command Script to be started when the Operator Client on the selected

workstation is started.

You must create a corresponding Command Script.

For creating a Command Script, see Managing Command Scripts, 66.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

68 en | Configuring Command Scripts Bosch Video Management System

To configure a startup script:

4 In the Startup script: list, select the required Command Script.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

12

Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access | en 69

Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access

12.1

Main window > User Groups

This chapter provides information on how to configure user groups, Enterprise User Groups and

Enterprise Access. You make all settings per user group and not per user. A user can only be

the member of one user group or Enterprise User Group.

You cannot change the settings of a default user group.

This user group has access to all the devices of the Full Logical Tree and is assigned the

Always schedule.

For accessing the Windows user groups of a domain, LDAP user groups are used.

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available application windows:

User Properties page, 175

Add New User Group/Account dialog box, 173

User Group Properties page, 174

Add New Dual Authorization Group dialog box, 175

LDAP Server Settings dialog box, 179

Copy User Group Permissions dialog box, 178

Select User Groups dialog box, 176

Logical Tree page, 182

Events and Alarms page, 179

Operator Features page, 182

Priorities page, 184

Camera Permissions page, 177

Decoder Permissions page, 179

User Interface page, 184

1.

Click to save the settings.

2.

Click to undo the last setting.

3.

Click to activate the configuration.

See also

Add New Dual Authorization Group dialog box, 175

Add New User Group/Account dialog box, 173

Creating a user

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab

You create a user as a new member of an existing user group or Enterprise User Group.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

70 en | Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access

12.2

i

Bosch Video Management System

Notice!

A user who wants to operate a CCTV keyboard must have a number-only user name and password. The user name can have maximum 3 numbers; the password can have maximum 6 numbers.

To create a user:

1.

Select a group and click .

A new user is added to the User Groups tree.

2.

Right-click the new user and click Rename.

3.

Enter the desired name and press ENTER.

4.

On the User Properties page, enter the user name and the password.

Creating a group or account

Main window > User Groups

You can create a standard user group, an Enterprise User Group or an Enterprise Account.

For adapting the user group permissions to your requirements, create a new user group and

change its settings.

You perform the task of creating an Enterprise User Group for an Enterprise Management system on the Enterprise Management Server.

You create an Enterprise User Group with users to configure their operating permissions. These operating permissions are available on an Operator Client that is connected to the Enterprise

Management Server. An example of an operating permission is the user interface of the alarm

monitor.

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

You perform the task of creating an Enterprise Account on a Management Server. Repeat this task on each Management Server that is a member of your Enterprise System.

You create an Enterprise Account to configure the device permissions for an Operator Client

using an Enterprise System.

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access | en 71

12.3

To create a group or account:

1.

Click the desired tab for the group or account that you want to add:

- User Groups

- Enterprise User Groups

- Enterprise Access

2.

Click .

The appropriate dialog box is displayed.

3.

Type in the name and a description.

4.

For an Enterprise Account enter a password and confirm this password.

5.

Click OK.

A new group or account is added to the corresponding tree.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

See also

Enterprise System, 188

User Group Properties page, 174

Credentials page, 181

Server Access page, 185

Add New Dual Authorization Group dialog box, 175

Add New User Group/Account dialog box, 173

Creating a dual authorization group

Main window >

Group dialog box or

User Groups > User Groups tab > > New Dual Authorization

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab >

Dual Authorization Group dialog box

> New Enterprise

You select two groups. The members of these groups are the members of the new dual authorization group.

You can configure dual authorization for user groups and for Enterprise User Groups.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

72 en | Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access

12.4

Bosch Video Management System

To create:

1.

Type in a name and description.

2.

Click .

The appropriate dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select a group in each list.

It is possible to select the same group in the second list.

4.

For each group, select Force dual authorization if required.

When this check box is selected, each user of the first group can only log on together with a user of the second group.

When this check box is cleared, each user of the first group can log on alone but he only has the access rights of his group.

See also

Logon Pair Properties page, 176

Add New Dual Authorization Group dialog box, 175

Select User Groups dialog box, 176

Configuring LDAP settings

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

12.5

i

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

Caution!

Do not assign an LDAP group to different Bosch Video Management System user groups. This

can result in not intended permissions for these users.

Notice!

Type the search paths accurately. Wrong paths can make the search on an LDAP server very slow.

You configure LDAP groups in standard user groups or Enterprise User Groups.

To configure LDAP settings:

1.

Click the User Group Properties tab.

2.

In the LDAP Properties field, make the appropriate settings.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Associating an LDAP group

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access | en 73

12.6

12.7

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

You associate an LDAP group with a Bosch Video Management System user group to give the users of this LDAP group access to the Operator Client. The users of the LDAP group have the access rights of the user group where you configure the LDAP group.

You probably need the help of the IT administrator who is responsible for the LDAP server.

You configure LDAP groups in standard user groups or Enterprise User Groups.

To associate an LDAP group:

1.

Click the User Group Properties tab.

2.

In the LDAP Properties field, click Settings.

The LDAP Server Settings dialog box is displayed.

3.

Enter the settings of your LDAP server and click OK.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

4 In the LDAP Groups: list, double-click an LDAP group.

This LDAP group is entered in the Associated LDAP group: field.

Scheduling user logon permission

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

You can limit the members of a user group or Enterprise User Group to log on to their computers

at specified time periods.

You cannot change these settings for a default user group.

To schedule logging on:

1.

Click the User Group Properties tab.

2.

In the Logon schedule: list, select a schedule.

Configuring operating permissions

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

You can configure operating permissions like Logbook access.

You cannot change these settings for a default user group.

You configure operating permissions in standard user groups or Enterprise User Groups.

To configure operating permissions:

1.

Click the Operator Features tab.

2.

Select or clear the check boxes as appropriate.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

74 en | Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access

12.8

Bosch Video Management System

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring user interface settings

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

12.9

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

You can configure a multi monitor mode with up to 4 monitors. You set for every monitor what

is displayed on it, e.g. monitor 2 only displays Live Image panes or Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 use

the 16:9 aspect ratio for HD cameras.

You configure operating permissions in standard user groups or Enterprise User Groups.

To configure user interface settings:

1.

Click the User Interface tab.

2.

In the 4 monitor list, select the required entries.

If you click Restore Default, all list entries are reset to their default settings.

3.

If required, select the Save settings when shutting down check box to enable the user to save his individual settings when shutting down the Operator Client.

Configuring permissions for Logical Tree

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions

You can set the permissions for all devices of the Logical Tree independently.

In an Enterprise System, these permissions are valid for the access of Enterprise User Group users to the devices of a local Management Server, controlled by Enterprise Accounts.

After you have moved permitted devices to a folder that is not permitted for this user group, you must set the permissions for the folder to grant access to its devices.

You cannot change these settings for a default user group.

You configure device permissions in standard user groups or Enterprise Accounts.

To configure permissions:

1.

In the User Groups tree, select a user group or account.

2.

Click the Logical Tree tab.

3.

Select or clear the check boxes as appropriate.

Selecting an item below a node, automatically selects the node.

Selecting a node, automatically selects all items below.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

12.10

Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access | en 75

Configuring permissions for events and alarms

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions

12.11

12.12

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions

You configure which events the user group or account is authorized to process.

You cannot change these settings for a default user group.

You configure permissions for events and alarms in standard user groups or Enterprise Accounts.

To configure permission for events and alarms:

1.

In the User Groups tree, select a user group or account.

2.

Click the Events and Alarms tab.

3.

Select the check box to enable all available events and alarms.

Or:

Select the required check boxes to enable the appropriate events and alarms.

Configuring camera permissions

Main window > User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions or

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions

You can configure various permissions for cameras, e.g. PTZ control.

You cannot change these settings for a default user group.

You configure camera permissions in standard user groups or Enterprise Accounts.

To configure camera permissions:

1.

In the User Groups tree, select a user group or account.

2.

Click the Camera Permissions tab.

3.

Select or clear the check boxes as appropriate.

For detailed information on the various fields, see the Online Help for the appropriate application window.

Configuring decoder permissions

Main window > User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions or

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions

You can configure permissions for decoders.

You cannot change these settings for a default group.

You configure decoder permissions in standard user groups or Enterprise Accounts.

To configure decoder permissions:

1.

In the User Groups tree, select a user group or account.

2.

Click the Decoder Permissions tab.

3.

Select or clear the check boxes as appropriate.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

76 en | Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access

12.13

Configuring various priorities

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab

12.14

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > or

User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab

You can configure the following priorities:

– For standard user groups and Enterprise User Groups: You can configure the alarm priorities for Live Mode and Playback Mode.

– For standard user groups and Enterprise Access: You can configure the priorities for

acquiring PTZ controls and Bosch Allegiant trunk lines.

You can configure a time period for PTZ locking, i.e. a user with higher priority can take over the camera control from a user with a lower priority and locks it for this time period.

To configure live and playback priorities:

1.

Select a standard user group or an Enterprise User Group.

2.

Click Operating Permissions.

3.

Click the Priorities tab.

4.

In the Automatic Popup Behavior field, move the sliders as required.

To configure priorities for PTZ and Bosch Allegiant trunk lines:

1.

Select a standard user group or an Enterprise Account.

2.

Click Device Permissions.

3.

Click the Control Priorities tab.

4.

In the Control Priorities field, move the sliders as required.

5.

In the Timeout in min. list, select the required entry.

Copying user group permissions

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab

Main window > or

User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab

You can copy permissions from one group or account to another. You must have configured at least 2 groups or accounts.

To copy permissions:

1.

In the User Groups tree, select a group or account.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuring users, permissions and Enterprise Access | en 77

2.

Click .

The Copy User Group Permissions dialog box is displayed.

3.

Select the appropriate permissions and the appropriate target group or account.

4.

Click OK. The group permissions of this group are copied to the other group or account.

The dialog box is closed.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

78 en | Managing configuration data Bosch Video Management System

13

13.1

i

Managing configuration data

Main window

You must activate the current configuration to make it valid for the Management Server and

Operator Client. The system reminds you to activate when exiting the Configuration Client.

Every activated configuration is saved with the date and with a description if required.

At every point in time you can restore a recently activated configuration. All configurations saved in the meantime get lost.

And you can export the current configuration in a configuration file and import this file later.

This restores the exported configuration. All configurations saved in the meantime get lost.

Offline configuration

You can import an exported configuration on an offline computer with Bosch Video

Management System installed, change some configuration settings, and export this in a new configuration file again. This file you import in the online computer again.

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available application windows:

Activation Manager dialog box, 91

Activate Configuration dialog box, 92

License Manager dialog box, 92

License Activation dialog box, 92

Alarm Settings dialog box, 93

Stream Quality Settings dialog box, 93

Options dialog box, 94

Activating the working configuration

Main window

You activate the currently working configuration. The Operator Client uses the activated configuration after the next start if the user accepted it. If the activation is enforced, all open instances of the Operator Client in the network exit and start again. The user of each Operator

Client instance usually does not have to log on again. A new logon is only necessary if an automatic restart and relogon happened 3 times or more during the last hour.

You can configure a delayed activation time. If you configure a delayed activation time, the working configuration is not activated at once but at the time configured. If you configure another activation time later (delayed or not does not matter), this time is active now. The first configured activation time is removed.

When you exit the Configuration Client the system reminds you to activate the current working copy of the configuration.

Notice!

If the activation is enforced, each instance of Operator Client restarts when the configuration is activated. Avoid unnecessary activations. Perform activations preferably in the night or during time periods with low activities.

To activate the currently working configuration:

1.

Click .

The Activate Configuration dialog box is displayed.

2.

If appropriate, enter a delayed activation time. As per default, the present point in time is configured as activation time. If you do not change the delayed activation time, the activation is performed immediately.

If appropriate, click to check Force activation for all Operator Clients.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Managing configuration data | en 79

13.2

13.3

13.4

3.

Type a description and click OK.

The current configuration is activated.

Each Operator Client workstation is instantly restarted, if connected to the network and the activation is enforced. If a workstation is not connected, it is restarted as soon it is connected again.

If you configured a delayed activation time, the configuration will be activated later.

Activating a configuration

Main window

You can activate a previous version of the configuration that you have saved earlier.

To activate a configuration:

1.

On the System menu, click Activation Manager....

The Activation Manager dialog box is displayed.

2.

In the list, select the configuration you want to activate.

3.

Click Activate.

A message box is displayed.

4.

Click OK.

The Activate Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5.

If appropriate, click to check Force activation for all Operator Clients. Each Operator

Client workstation is automatically restarted to activate the new configuration. The user cannot refuse the new configuration.

If Force activation for all Operator Clients is not checked, on each Operator Client workstation a dialog box appears for some seconds. The user can refuse or accept the new configuration. The dialog box is closed after a few seconds without user interaction.

In this case the new configuration is not accepted.

Exporting configuration data

Main window

You can export the device configuration data of Bosch Video Management System in a database file and the user data in a .zip file. You can use this functionality for data backup.

You can use these files for restoring a system configuration.

Caution!

Stop Bosch Video Management System Management Server service before you copy the exported configuration file.

To export configuration data:

1.

On the System menu, click Activation Manager....

The Activation Manager dialog box is displayed.

2.

Click Export.

3.

Enter a filename.

The current configuration is exported. A .bvms file with configuration data and a .zip file with the user data is created.

Exporting configuration data to OPC

Main window

You can export the device configuration data of Bosch Video Management System in an XML file to import it in an OPC Server application. The file must be stored in the bin directory of your Bosch Video Management System installation.

For configuring a Bosch VMS - BIS connection the Bosch VMS - BIS Interface Configuration

Manual is available.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

80 en | Managing configuration data Bosch Video Management System

Caution!

Install OPC server and Bosch Video Management System Management Server on different computers.

If both the servers run on the same computer, the performance of the systems is reduced. Additionally serious software crashes can appear.

To export configuration data:

1.

On the System menu, click Export Device Information for OPC....

The Export Device Information File dialog box is displayed.

2.

Enter a file name and click Save.

The file is saved.

You can import this file in your OPC server application.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

14

14.1

Configuration examples

Configuration examples | en 81

This chapter contains examples on how to configure selected devices in Bosch Video

Management System.

Creating an Enterprise System

You perform the tasks for creating an Enterprise System on a Enterprise Management Server

and on multiple Management Server computers.

This example covers the Scenario 1 described in the Enterprise System, 188 chapter:

Figure 14.1: Enterprise Scenario 1

You need valid licenses for using an Enterprise System.

14.1.1

See also

Enterprise System, 188

Licensing, 191

Adding multiple Management Server computers

Main window > Devices > Enterprise System > Server List

You perform this task of adding multiple Management Server computers in Configuration

Client on the Enterprise Management Server.

You add multiple Management Server computers to configure a Bosch VMS Enterprise System. A

user of Operator Client can log on with user name of a member an Enterprise User Group to get simultaneous access to these Management Server computers.

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

82 en | Configuration examples Bosch Video Management System

Operating permissions are configured on the Enterprise Management Server in

Groups, Enterprise User Group tab.

User

Device permissions are configured on each Management Server in

Enterprise Access tab.

To add:

User Groups,

1.

Click Add Server.

The Add Server dialog box is displayed.

2.

Type in a display name for the server and the network address (DNS name or IP address).

3.

Click OK.

4.

Repeat these steps until you have added all desired Management Server computers.

P The Management Server computers for your Enterprise System are configured.

Now configure the desired Enterprise User Groups and the Enterprise Access.

The following screenshot shows an example:

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuration examples | en 83

14.1.2

See also

Server List page, 96

Enterprise System, 188

User Groups page, 172

Creating an Enterprise User Group

Main window > User Groups

You perform the task of creating an Enterprise User Group for an Enterprise Management system on the Enterprise Management Server.

You create an Enterprise User Group with users to configure their operating permissions. These operating permissions are available on an Operator Client that is connected to the Enterprise

Management Server. An example of an operating permission is the user interface of the alarm

monitor.

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

84 en | Configuration examples Bosch Video Management System

To create an Enterprise User Group:

1.

Click the Enterprise User Groups tab.

2.

Click .

The New Enterprise User Group dialog box is displayed.

3.

Type in the name and a description.

4.

Click OK.

The Enterprise User Group is added to the corresponding tree.

5.

Configure the operating permissions and server access for the configured Management

Server computers as required.

The following screenshot shows an example:

14.1.3

Creating an Enterprise Account

Main window > User Groups

You perform the task of creating an Enterprise Account on a Management Server. Repeat this task on each Management Server that is a member of your Enterprise System.

You create an Enterprise Account to configure the device permissions for an Operator Client

using an Enterprise System.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Configuration examples | en 85

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

To create an Enterprise Account:

1.

Click the Enterprise Access tab.

2.

Click .

The New Enterprise Account dialog box is displayed.

3.

Type in the name and a description.

4.

Click OK.

The Enterprise Account is added to the corresponding tree.

5.

Configure the credentials and the device permissions as required.

The following screenshot shows an example:

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

86 en | Configuration examples Bosch Video Management System

14.2

Adding a Bosch ATM/POS bridge

This example describes how to set up a Bosch ATM/POS bridge.

Configuring the ATM/POS bridge

1.

Ensure that the device is powered.

2.

To configure the IP address and subnet mask of the device connect it to a COM port of your computer with a RS232 cable (use the specified Bosch cable for connection). See the Installation Manual of the Bosch ATM/POS bridge for details.

3.

On this computer, start a Hyper terminal session (usually: Start > Programs >

Accessories > Communications > Hyper Terminal).

4.

Type a name for the session and click OK.

5.

Select the COM port number and click OK.

6.

Enter the following COM port settings:

– 9600 bits/s

– 8 data bits

– no parity

– 1 stop bit

– hardware flow control

Click OK.

7.

Press F1 for displaying the system options menu of the device.

8.

Enter 1 to set the IP address and the subnet mask as required.

9.

Leave the default settings for the ports:

– port1: 4201

– port2: 4200

Adding the ATM/POS bridge to Bosch Video Management System

1.

Connect the device to your Bosch Video Management System network.

2.

Start Configuration Client.

3.

Click Devices, expand the Logical Tree, expand

Add Bosch ATM/POS-Bridge.

The Add Bosch ATM/POS-Bridge dialog box is displayed.

, right-click

4.

Type a name as desired and type the settings that you configured earlier.

5.

Click the Inputs tab and select the required inputs.

6.

Click to save the settings.

7.

, click

Click Events.

8.

Expand , expand POS Bridge Input, click Data Input.

9.

In the Trigger Alarm list, select Always to ensure that this event always triggers an alarm.

If you want the event trigger an alarm only during a certain time span, select a schedule.

10.

Click to save the settings.

11.

Click

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Alarms.

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

14.3

14.4

Configuration examples | en 87

12. Configure the desired alarm settings for this event.

13.

Click to save the settings and click to activate the configuration.

14. Perform a test to ensure that the alarm is working as desired.

Adding a Bosch Allegiant input alarm

After a Bosch Allegiant device is added to Bosch Video Management System, you add Allegiant alarm inputs.

1.

On the Device Tree, click the Allegiant device entry.

2.

Click the Inputs tab and click Add Input.

3.

Add the desired input alarms.

4.

Click Events.

5.

In the Event Tree, expand Allegiant Devices, expand Allegiant Input, and click Input

Closed or Input Opened (depends on your application).

6.

In the Trigger Alarm list, select Always to ensure that an event always triggers an alarm.

If you want the event trigger an alarm only during a certain time span, select a schedule.

7.

Click to save the settings and click to activate the configuration.

8.

Perform a test to ensure that the alarm is working as desired.

Adding and configuring 2 Dinion IP cameras with VRM recording

This section describes how to add 2 Dinion IP cameras for VRM recording, how to configure

different recording settings and how to configure Forensic Search for these cameras.

Prerequisite:

VRM and iSCSI devices are properly configured.

This means:

– The VRM is added to the Device Tree.

An iSCSI device with configured target and LUN is assigned to this VRM.

To add the IP cameras to an existing VRM:

Main window >

1.

Devices > Expand

Right-click and click Add Encoder.

The Add Encoder dialog box is displayed.

2.

Type the IP address of the IP camera and select the encoder type (Dinion IP).

Click OK.

Repeat this step for the other IP camera.

To add the IP cameras to the Logical Tree:

Main window > Maps and Structure

4 Drag the cameras to the Logical Tree.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

88 en | Configuration examples

To change camera properties:

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Cameras and Recording > > tab

1.

In the Live Video column, configure the quality of live display. For these devices, you can only set the live quality per camera, not schedule dependent.

2.

Make the appropriate settings in the other columns.

To configure recording settings for the cameras:

1.

Click a schedule tab, for example .

2.

In the column, click a cell and select the appropriate stream quality.

3.

Under Continuous or Prealarm Recording, in the Select column, select the desired recording mode.

If you click Prealarm: Click a cell in the Duration column to select the alarm recording time before the alarm in seconds.

4.

Under Alarm Recording, in the Duration column, click a cell and type the desired recording time.

5.

Repeat the previous steps to configure the recording settings for the other camera.

To enable Forensic Search on a workstation:

Main window >

1.

Devices > Expand

Click the icon of your workstation.

2.

Click the Settings tab.

3.

Click to select the Enable Forensic Search check box.

Performing a Forensic Search

Operator Client VRM main window > > Timeline tab

Perform the Forensic Search on the workstation where you have enabled Forensic Search.

To perform a Forensic Search:

1.

Using the Hairline, select the time period on the Timeline and select the corresponding

Image pane.

2.

Click .

The Forensic Search dialog box is displayed.

The selected time period is copied to the Start: and End: fields.

If required, change the values. Click .

3.

In the Algorithm: list, select an IVA entry.

4.

In the Surveillance Tasks field, configure your Forensic Search.

You can find information on this in the relevant documents on the product CD supplied.

5.

Click Search to start the Forensic Search.

The

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

window with the matching entries is displayed.

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

15

15.1

Global Configuration Client windows | en 89

Global Configuration Client windows

This chapter contains information on some basic application windows available in Bosch Video

Management System Configuration Client.

Configuration window

Main window

Allows you to configure your system. The buttons in the toolbar represent the various pages which you must configure to get a running system. Their sequence represents the recommended workflow of configuration.

4 Click a tree item to display the available property pages.

Devices

Click to display the Devices page with all devices connected to the system.

Maps and Structure

Click to display the Maps and Structure page with Logical Tree, Device Tree, and maps.

Schedules

Click to display the Recording Schedules and Task Schedules page.

Cameras and Recording

Click to display the Cameras and Recording page with the Camera Table and the recording settings of all cameras.

Events

Click to display the Events page.

Alarms

Click to display the Alarms page.

User Groups

Click to display the User Groups page with all users.

Click to save the changed settings of the current window.

Click to restore the saved settings of the current window.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

90 en | Global Configuration Client windows Bosch Video Management System

Click to display the Activate Configuration dialog box.

Click to delete the selected item. (Not available on every page).

Click to rename the selected item. (Not available on every page).

Click to display help information on the current window.

15.2

Click to refresh the state information for all devices (not available on every page). You can refresh the state of a single device: Right-click the device and click Refresh state.

Note: When you have a large system with several 1000 devices configured, the process of refreshing states can take a long time.

Menu commands

System menu commands

Save Changes

Undo All Changes on Page

Activation Manager...

Export Device Information for

OPC...

Saves all changes made on this page.

Restores the settings of this page since the last saving.

Displays the Activation Manager dialog box.

Displays a dialog box for creating a configuration file that you can import in a 3rd party management system.

Exits the program.

Exit

Hardware menu commands

Initial Device Scan...

NVR & Decoder Scan...

IP Device Configuration...

Failover NVR Manager...

Displays the Initial Device Scan dialog box.

Displays the NVR & Decoder Scan dialog box.

Displays a dialog box for configuring IP devices.

Displays a dialog box for re-assigning cameras to a fixed NVR.

Tools menu commands

Command Script Editor...

Resource Manager...

Sequence Builder...

Resource Converter

Displays the Command Script Editor dialog box

Displays the Resource Manager dialog box.

Displays the Sequence Builder dialog box.

Displays the Resource Converter dialog box if old

map resources in DWF format are available.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

15.3

Global Configuration Client windows | en 91

License Manager...

Settings menu commands

Alarm Settings

Set Recording Qualities...

Options...

Help menu commands

Help

Displays the License Manager dialog box.

Displays the Alarm Settings dialog box.

Displays the Stream Quality Settings dialog box.

Displays the Options dialog box.

About...

Displays the Bosch Video Management System

Application Help.

Displays a dialog box containing information on the installed system, e.g., the version number.

Activation Manager dialog box

Main window > System menu > Activation Manager... command

Allows you to activate the current configuration or to rollback to a previous configuration.

Additionally you can export configuration files.

Export

Click to display a dialog box for entering a name of the configuration file for export.

Activate

Click to display the Activate Configuration dialog box.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

92 en | Global Configuration Client windows

15.4

15.5

15.6

Activate Configuration dialog box

Bosch Video Management System

Main window >

Allows you to type a description for the working copy of the configuration to be activated.

Set Delayed Activation time

Click to select a delayed activation time.

Force activation for all Operator Clients

If checked, each Operator Client workstation is automatically restarted to activate the new configuration. The user cannot refuse the new configuration.

If not checked, on each Operator Client workstation a dialog box appears for some seconds.

The user can refuse or accept the new configuration. The dialog box is closed after a few seconds without user interaction. In this case the new configuration is not accepted.

License Manager dialog box

Main window > Tools menu > License Manager... command

Allows you to license the Bosch Video Management System package that you have ordered and to upgrade with additional features.

Base Packages

Displays the available base packages.

Type Number

Displays the Commercial Type Number (CTN) of the selected package, feature or expansion.

Status

Displays the licensing status if applicable.

Optional Features

Displays the available features.

Expansion

Displays the available expansions and their count. To change the count point right from a check box and click the up or down arrow.

Activate

Click to display the License Activation dialog box.

Import Bundle Info

Click to import an XML file containing a Bundle Information that you received from Bosch.

Add New Package

Click to display a dialog box for selecting a new license file.

License Activation dialog box

Main window > Tools menu > License Manager... command > License Manager dialog box >

Activate button

Allows you to license the Bosch Video Management System packages that you have ordered and to upgrade with additional packages.

For obtaining the License Activation Key you must contact the Bosch Activation Center and specify the desired package and the computer signature of the Management Server.

Additionally you need the Authorization Number. This number is included in your software box.

License Activation Key:

Allows you to type the License Activation Key received from the Bosch Activation Center.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

15.7

Alarm Settings dialog box

Global Configuration Client windows | en 93

15.8

Main window > Alarms >

See Alarm Settings dialog box, 168 for details.

Stream Quality Settings dialog box

Main window > Cameras and Recording >

Allows you to configure stream quality profiles that you can later assign to the recording modes.

A stream quality combines video resolution, frame rate, maximum bandwidth, and video

compression.

Click to add a new stream quality.

Click to delete a selected stream quality. You cannot delete the default recording settings.

Name:

Displays the name of the stream quality. When you add a new stream quality, you can change the name.

SD video resolution:

Select the desired video resolution. For an HD quality you configure the SD quality of stream

2.

Image encoding interval:

Move the slider or type the appropriate value.

The system calculates the corresponding values for IPS (PAL and NTSC).

With the image encoding interval you configure the interval at which images are encoded and transmitted. If 1 is entered, all images are encoded. Entering 4 means that only every fourth image is encoded, the following three images are skipped - this can be particularly advantageous with low bandwidths. The lower the bandwidth the higher this value should be to achieve best-quality video.

Target bit rate [Kbps]:

Move the slider or type the appropriate value.

You can limit the data rate for the encoder to optimize usage of bandwidth in your network.

The target data rate should be set according to the desired picture quality for typical scenes with no excessive motion.

For complex images or frequent changes of image content due to frequent movements, this limit can be temporarily exceeded up to the value you enter in the Maximum bit rate [Kbps]: field.

Maximum bit rate [Kbps]:

Move the slider or type the appropriate value.

With the maximum bit rate you configure the maximum transmission speed which cannot be exceeded.

You set a bit rate limit to be able to reliably determine the appropriate disk space for storage of the video data.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

94 en | Global Configuration Client windows

15.9

Bosch Video Management System

Depending on the video quality settings for the I- and P-Frames, this fact can result in individual images being skipped.

The value entered here must be at least 10% higher than the value entered in the Target bit

rate [Kbps]: field. If the value entered here is too low, it will automatically be adjusted.

I-Frame Distance

This parameter allows you to set the intervals in which the I-Frames are coded. Click

Automatic, to insert I-Frames as necessary. An entry of 1 indicates that I-Frames are continuously generated. An entry of 2 indicates that only every second image is an I-Frame, and 3 only every third image etc. The I-Frames in between are coded as P-Frames.

Frame Quality Level

Here you can set a value between 0 and 100 for both the I-Frames and the P-Frames. The lowest value results in the highest quality and the lowest frame refresh rate. The highest value results in the highest frame refresh rate and the lowest image quality.

The lower the available transmission bandwidth, the higher adjust the quality level to maintain high quality of the video.

Note:

You adjust the video quality dependent on the motion and level of detail in the video. If you check the Automatic check boxes, the optimum relationship between motion and image definition is automatically adjusted.

VIP X1600 XFM4 Settings

Allows you to configure the following H.264 settings for the VIP X 1600 XFM4 encoder module.

H.264 deblocking filter: Select to improve visual quality and prediction performance by smoothing the sharp edges.

CABAC: Select to activate high efficient compression. Uses a large amount of processing power.

Options dialog box

Main window > Settings menu > Options... command

Language

Allows you to configure the language of your Configuration Client. If you select Default system

language the language of your Windows installation is used.

Scan Options

Allows you to configure the scan process. Subnet allows that scanning is only active in the current subnet. Cross subnet allows for scanning beyond a router in other subnets. If the scan process does not find devices with one of these options, try the other one.

Analog Monitor Group (AMG) Settings

Allows you to configure that the users can control all analog monitor groups with each Bosch

Video Management System client computer. It is then not required to configure this computer as a workstation in the Device Tree.

Logbook Configuration

Allows you to configure the connection string for the Logbook database (Database Connection

String (restart Management Server after changing this string):). Change this string only when you want to configure a remote SQL server for the Logbook and only when you are familiar with SQL server technology.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16 Devices page

Devices page | en 95

Main window > Devices

Displays the Device Tree and the configuration pages.

The count of items below an entry is displayed in square brackets.

Allows you to configure the available devices, such as mobile video services, ONVIF encoders,

Bosch Video Streaming Gateway devices, encoders, decoders, VRMs, local storage encoders,

analog matrices, or peripheral devices like ATM / POS bridges.

To add NVRs, decoders, and encoders to the system, click . The network is scanned for new devices. NVRs and decoders are automatically added to your system. Encoders must be manually assigned to NVRs, even if they are not recorded.

To add VRMs, iSCSI storage, encoders (live only, local storage, recorded), click VRM & iSCSI

Devices Scan.

Unassigned encoders do not appear in the Device Tree. They are not part of your system until you assign them to a VRM or NVR.

Note:

Video data from encoders that are assigned to an NVR, is always encoded with MPEG-4.

Devices are represented in a tree and grouped by the physical network structure and the device categories.

Video sources like encoders are grouped under VRMs. Digital video recorders such as DiBos

are listed separately.

NVR & Decoder Scan

Click to display the NVR & Decoder Scan dialog box.

Scans the network for NVRs, decoders, and encoders. When the scan process is finished, a dialog box for assigning the detected encoders to NVRs is displayed.

VRM & iSCSI Devices Scan

Click to display the Bosch VMS Scan Wizard dialog box.

Scans the network for VRMs, iSCSI devices, live only encoders, local storage encoders, or

VIDOS NVRs.

Failover NVR Manager

Click to display the Failover NVR Manager dialog box.

IP Device Configuration

Click to display the IP Device Configuration dialog box.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

4 Click a tree item to display the corresponding page.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

96 en | Devices page

16.1

Bosch Video Management System

Server List page

You perform this task of adding multiple Management Server computers in Configuration

Client on the Enterprise Management Server.

You add multiple Management Server computers to configure a Bosch VMS Enterprise System. A

user of Operator Client can log on with user name of a member an Enterprise User Group to get simultaneous access to these Management Server computers.

The following illustration shows the part of the scenario where you perform this task:

Operating permissions are configured on the Enterprise Management Server in

Groups, Enterprise User Group tab.

User

16.1.1

Device permissions are configured on each Management Server in

Enterprise Access tab.

Add Server

Click to display the Add Server dialog box.

Delete Server

Click to remove the selected Management Server entries.

User Groups,

Management Server

This column displays the display names of all added Management Server computers. You can change each entry.

Network Address

This column displays the IP addresses of all added Management Server computers. You can change each entry.

Server Number

This column displays the logical numbers of all added Management Server computers. You can change each entry.

Add Server dialog box

Main window >

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Devices > Enterprise System > Server List

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.2

16.3

Devices page | en 97

Server Name:

Type in the display name of the Management Server.

Network Address:

Type in the IP address or DNS name of the Management Server.

Initial Device Scan dialog box

Main window > Hardware menu > Initial Device Scan... command

Displays the devices which have duplicate IP addresses or a default IP address (192.168.0.1).

Allows you to change such IP addresses and subnet masks.

You must enter the correct subnet mask before changing an IP address.

NVR & Decoder Scan dialog box

16.4

i

Main window > Devices > NVR & Decoder Scan

Displays detected encoders, NVRs, and decoders.

Allows you to assign detected encoders to an NVR. This is required to store the video data of

the encoder on an NVR and to manage events of their assigned devices.

Unassigned devices do not appear in the Device Tree.

Notice!

Only devices in the local subnet are detected automatically. If a device is located in another subnet, add it manually to the Device Tree. To perform this, right-click the required node (for example an NVR), click Add Encoder, type the IP address of the device, click the Network tab and enter the subnet mask of the device.

Unassigned Encoders

Displays the unassigned encoders that were detected.

Assigned Encoders and NVRs

Displays assigned encoders and NVRs. NVRs are automatically assigned when they are detected. For assigning encoders you must drag them from the Unassigned Encoders list to an NVR.

Decoders

Displays the detected decoders.

Configure Devices

Click to display the IP Device Configuration dialog box.

Next >

Click to display the next page of this dialog box. If the device names differ from their names in

Bosch Video Management System, a dialog box is displayed for changing the names as required.

Finish

Click to confirm the scan results and the assignments of encoders and close the dialog box.

Bosch VMS Scan Wizard

Main window > Devices > VRM & iSCSI Devices Scan

Allows you to detect the following devices and assign them to Bosch Video Management

System:

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

98 en | Devices page

16.5

Bosch Video Management System

VRMs, iSCSI storage devices (you can assign encoders during the scan process)

– Live only and local storage encoders

– VIDOS NVRs

Assign

Click to assign selected devices to their parent device. For example you assign encoders to a

VRM.

Assign All

Click to assign all scanned devices to their parent device.

Remove

Click to remove a device from its parent device. The recordings of a removed device are not removed. You can find them when you add this device again.

Remove All

Click to remove all devices from their parent device. The recordings of a removed device are not removed. You can find them when you add this device again.

Failover NVR Manager dialog box

16.6

Main window > Devices >

Displays status information on your Failover NVRs.

IP Device Configuration dialog box

Main window > Devices >

Displays the following properties of the available IP devices:

– Device name and type

– Connection type (BVIP or ONVIF)

– IP address

– Subnet mask

– System password

– Firmware version

– Gateway IP address

Allows you to set the following properties of the available IP devices:

– Display name

– IP address

– Firmware version

You can configure display names, IP addresses and firmware versions for multiple devices at once.

Click to refresh the state information for all devices (not available on every page). You can refresh the state of a single device: Right-click the device and click Refresh state.

Note: When you have a large system with several 1000 devices configured, the process of refreshing states can take a long time.

Update Firmware

Click to update the firmware version of the selected device.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.7

Devices page | en 99

Show Passwords

Click to clear when you want the configured passwords being displayed in readable form.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

Apply

Click to configure the devices with the entered values without closing the dialog box.

Set IP Addresses dialog box

16.8

16.9

Main window > Devices > > IP Device Configuration dialog box > Right-click two or more entries > Click Set IP Addresses...

Allows you to set the IP addresses for multiple IP devices.

Start with:

Type the first IP address.

End with:

Displays the last IP address for the selected devices after having clicked Calculate.

Calculate

Click to calculate the range of IP addresses for the selected devices.

Set Display Names dialog box

Main window > Devices > > IP Device Configuration dialog box > Right-click two or more entries > Click Set Display Names...

Allows you to set the display names for multiple IP devices.

Start with:

Type the first name.

End with:

Displays the last name for the selected devices after having clicked Calculate.

Calculate

Click to calculate the range of display names for the selected devices.

NVRs / Failover NVRs / Redundant NVRs page

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand >

Main window > or

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Devices > Expand > Expand >

Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

100 en | Devices page Bosch Video Management System

16.9.1

16.9.2

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Displays the property pages of a selected NVR, Failover NVR, or Redundant NVR.

4 Click a tab to display the corresponding property page.

Global Settings page

Main window > tab or

Devices > Expand > Expand > > Global Settings

Main window > tab

Devices > Expand

Displays the following information:

DNS name or IP address of the NVR.

> Expand > > Global Settings

This name is used for display in the Device Tree. You can only change this name in the

Windows settings of the computer serving as NVR.

– Several network related settings like MAC address or Default Gateway.

Allows you to configure a Failover NVR for the currently selected NVR.

Switch over to:

Select a Primary NVR to change its role to a Failover NVR.

Disk Storage page

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand > > Disk Storage tab

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand > > Disk Storage tab

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand > > Disk Storage tab

Allows you to configure the disks and network directories for storing the video data.

Caution!

We recommend to store all video data on only one storage drive. Do not use multiple paths.

Even if you must use more than 2 TB you can achieve such a large partition with appropriate formatting settings.

Add Network Path

Click to display a dialog box for selecting a network path.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.9.3

Devices page | en 101

Add Local Drive

Click to display a dialog box for selecting a local drive. This button is active only when a not configured local drive is available. You cannot select drive C:\ for storage.

Remove Storage

Click to display a dialog box for removing an added storage drive.

Use

Select a check box to select a drive for storage.

Drive

Displays the letter and the name of the drive.

Usage

Displays how much GB are used.

Camera Storage page

Main window > tab

Devices > Expand > Expand > > Camera Storage

Allows you to configure the backup settings for video data for assigned cameras.

Name

Displays the camera name as configured on the Cameras and Recording page.

Location

Displays the location of the camera as configured on the Maps and Structure page.

Min Time [days]

Click a cell to edit the minimum number of days that video data from this camera is to be retained. Recordings younger than this number of days are not deleted automatically.

Max Time [days]

Click a cell to edit the maximum number of days that video data from this camera is to be retained. All recordings including protected recordings older than this number of days are deleted automatically.

Caution!

Select the maximum number of days according to the available disk space or enlarge the disk space. Ensure that maximum 85% of the available disk space is used.

Caution!

Recordings with a time stamp lying between minimum and maximum time except for protected recordings are automatically deleted when disk space is low.

Keep Protected Recordings

Select the check box to ensure that protected recordings are not deleted when their time stamp exceeds the maximum storage time. If this option was configured for a camera that has been removed from the Device Tree afterwards, all recordings including protected recordings of this camera are deleted after exceeding the maximum storage time.

Export on

Select the computer where videos are exported for backup. You can select the Management

Server computer or this NVR computer. Exporting on the NVR is faster because exporting on

the Management Server creates an additional network load.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

102 en | Devices page

16.9.4

Bosch Video Management System

Caution!

If you select the Primary NVR computer, video data that has been recorded on a Failover NVR

during a downtime of the Primary NVR is not backed up.

Backup of video data uses as much network bandwidth as possible. Ensure that enough network performance is available.

Path

Select the path for the backup.

Schedule

Select the schedule for the backup.

Time [h]

Enter the number of hours into the past beginning with the scheduled time that you want to back up.

Assigned NVRs page

16.9.5

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand > > Assigned NVRs tab

Displays the Primary NVRs in your system and their assignment to the selected Failover NVR.

Allows you to assign or un-assign the available NVRs as required.

Remove NVR

Click to move the selected Primary NVRs to the Time [h] column.

Export on

Displays all Primary NVRs that are assigned to the selected Failover NVR.

Add NVR

Click to move the selected Primary NVRs to the Export on column.

Time [h]

Displays all Primary NVRs that are not assigned to the selected Failover NVR.

Assigned NVR page

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand > > Assigned NVR tab

Displays the Primary NVRs in your system and their assignment to the selected Redundant

NVR.

Allows you to assign or un-assign the available NVRs as required.

Click left to the Primary NVR name to configure this Primary NVR to be mirrored by the selected Redundant NVR.

Backup

Click to use the same camera storage settings as the Primary NVR. If you clear, the Camera

Storage tab becomes active and you can configure specific camera storage settings for this

Redundant NVR.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.9.6

Add Network Path dialog box

16.9.7

Devices page | en 103

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Add Network Path button

Allows you to add a network path as storage location.

> > Disk Storage tab >

UNC path (e.g. \\VideoStorage2\NVR4)

Type a network path. Use the syntax required for UNC paths: \\<computer_name>\<directory>

...

Click to display a dialog box for selecting a network path.

Logon necessary

Select the check box if the network path is protected by a user ID.

User name

Type the required user name.

Password

Type the required password.

Add Local NVR Drive dialog box

16.10

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand > > Disk Storage tab >

Add Local Drive button

Allows you to add a local drive of the selected NVR as storage location. Select a check box to activate the corresponding drive.

Select All

Click to select all check boxes.

Clear All

Click to clear all check boxes.

Vidos NVRs page

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Allows you to add and configure VIDOS NVRs.

You cannot configure VIDOS systems from within Bosch Video Management System.

Network Address:

Type the DNS name or the IP address of your VIDOS NVR.

User Name:

Type the user name for logging on to the VIDOS NVR.

Password:

Type the password for logging on to the VIDOS NVR.

DiBos page 16.11

Main window >

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Devices > >

Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

104 en | Devices page

16.11.1

Bosch Video Management System

Displays the property pages of a selected DiBos system.

Allows you to integrate a DiBos system into your system.

You cannot configure DiBos systems from within Bosch Video Management System.

4 Click a tab to display the corresponding property page.

Add DiBos System dialog box

16.11.2

16.11.3

16.11.4

Main window > Devices > Right-click > Add DiBos/BRS Recorder command

Allows you to add a DiBos system to your Bosch Video Management System.

Network address:

Type the DNS name or the IP address of your DiBos system.

User name:

Type the user name for logging on to the DiBos system.

Password:

Type the password for logging on to the DiBos system.

Settings page

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Settings tab

Displays the network settings of the DiBos system connected to your system. Allows you to change the settings if required.

Cameras page

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Cameras tab

Displays all cameras available on the DiBos system connected to your system.

Allows you to remove cameras.

Inputs page

16.11.5

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Inputs tab

Displays all inputs available on the DiBos system connected to your system.

Allows you to remove items.

Relays page

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Relays tab

Displays all relays available on the DiBos system connected to your system.

Allows you to remove items.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.12

Matrix Switches page

16.12.1

Devices page | en 105

Main window > Devices > >

Displays the property pages of the Bosch Allegiant device.

You do not configure the Bosch Allegiant device itself but only the Bosch Video Management

System related properties. For connecting an Allegiant device with Bosch VMS, see the

Concepts chapter in this Online Help. This chapter provides background information on selected issues.

You can additionally configure control priorities for Allegiant trunk lines.

4 Click a tab to display the corresponding property page.

Connection page

16.12.2

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Connection tab

Displays the name of the Bosch Allegiant configuration file.

Bosch Video Management System can read out a configuration file in structured storage format with the names and configuration information of all cameras connected to the Bosch

Allegiant device.

Update Configuration

Click to select an updated Bosch Allegiant configuration file.

Cameras page

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Cameras tab

Displays a camera table of the cameras that are connected to the Bosch Allegiant device.

No.

Displays the consecutive number of the camera.

Logical Number

Displays the logical number of the camera.

Camera Name

Displays the name of the camera.

Outputs page 16.12.3

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Outputs tab

Allows you to configure the usage of a Bosch Allegiant device output and to assign an encoder

to an output.

To store the video data of a Bosch Allegiant device output in Bosch Video Management

System, you must assign an encoder to the output. This encoder must be connected to the output.

No.

Displays the number of the output.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

106 en | Devices page

16.12.4

Bosch Video Management System

Allegiant Logical No.

Displays the logical number of the output within Allegiant.

Bosch VMS Logical No.

Allows you to change the logical number of the output within Bosch Video Management

System. If you enter an already used number, a message is displayed.

Name

Displays the name of the output.

Usage

Allows you to change the usage of the output.

If you select Digital Trunk, you can assign an encoder to this output in the Encoder field. The

Allegiant output becomes network-compatible.

If you select Allegiant Monitor, in the Operator Client the user can assign the camera signal to a hardware monitor. PTZ control is possible if the camera is configured as PTZ camera. In the

Operator Client, the user cannot drag this camera on an Image pane.

If you select Unused, the user cannot assign a monitor to an Allegiant camera.

Encoder

Allows you to assign an output to an encoder. You can only select an encoder when you have checked Digital Trunk. The encoder is locked for the Logical Tree. If you assign an encoder that is already in the Logical Tree, it is removed from there. In the Operator Client, the user can drag the camera to an Image pane.

Inputs page

16.13

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add inputs to a Bosch Allegiant device.

> Inputs tab

Add Input

Click to add a new row in the table for specifying a new input.

Delete Input

Click to remove a row from the table.

Input No.

Type the required number of the input. If you enter an already used number, a message is displayed.

Input Name

Type the required name of the input.

Workstation page

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to configure the following settings for a workstation:

– Add a digital keyboard connected to a Bosch Video Management System workstation.

Assign a Command Script that is executed on startup of the workstation.

– Select the data stream for live display.

– Enable Forensic Search.

Assign analog monitor groups to a workstation.

A workstation must have the Operator Client software installed.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Devices page | en 107

To add a CCTV keyboard that is connected to a decoder, expand

To assign an analog monitor group, configure such a group in

Settings page

>

, click

>

.

.

16.13.1

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Settings tab

Allows you to configure a script that is executed when the Operator Client on the workstation is started.

Allows you to configure which stream of an IP device is used for live display.

Allows you to enable Forensic Search for this workstation.

And you can configure the keyboard that is connected to this workstation.

Network address:

Type the DNS name or the IP address of your workstation.

Startup script:

Select the desired script that you want to be started when the workstation’s Operator Client is started. You create or import such a script on the Events page.

Override recording settings

Select the check box to enable selecting the desired stream for live view. The other one is used for continuous, motion, and alarm recording for this workstation.

See dual streaming in the glossary.

Enable Forensic Search

Click to enable Forensic Search for this workstation.

Use direct playback from storage

Select the check box to send the video stream directly from the storage device to this workstation. Now the stream is not sent via VRM. The workstation still needs connection to the VRM to ensure correct playback.

Retrieve Live video from Streaming Gateway instead of camera

Displays the list of Video Streaming Gateway devices. Select the desired entries to enable the transmission of video data via low bandwidth segments between the video source and this workstation.

Keyboard type:

Select the type of the keyboard that is connected to your workstation.

Port:

Select the COM port that is used to connect your keyboard.

Baudrate:

Select the maximum rate, in bits per second (bps), that you want data to be transmitted through this port. Usually, this is set to the maximum rate supported by the computer or device you are communicating with.

Data bits:

Displays the number of data bits you want to use for each character that is transmitted and received.

Stop bits:

Displays the time between each character being transmitted (where time is measured in bits).

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

108 en | Devices page

16.13.2

Bosch Video Management System

Parity:

Displays the type of error checking you want to use for the selected port.

Port type:

Displays the connection type that is used to connect the CCTV keyboard with the workstation.

Assigned Analog Monitor Groups page

16.14

16.15

Main window > tab

Devices > Expand > > Assigned Analog Monitor Groups

Allows you to assign an analog monitor group to this workstation. Beforehand you must have

added an analog monitor group in > > .

Assigned Analog Monitor Groups

Select the check box to assign the analog monitor group to this workstation. In the Options dialog box, you can configure that all other workstations can also control analog monitor groups.

Analog Monitor Group

Displays the name of each analog monitor group.

Decoders page

Main window > Devices > Expand

Allows you to configure decoders.

See Encoders / Decoders page, 128 for details.

Analog Monitor Groups page

>

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add and configure analog monitor groups. You assign an analog monitor group to a

Bosch Video Management System workstation in .

Caution!

You cannot control an analog monitor group from within Operator Client when the connection to the Management Server is lost or when Operator Client with Enterprise System is used.

Settings page 16.15.1

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Settings tab

Allows you to perform the following tasks:

Configure an analog monitor group

Assign decoders to an analog monitor group

– Enable quad view for decoders that support quad view

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.15.2

Devices page | en 109

Name:

Type the name of the analog monitor group.

Columns:

Enter the number of columns for the analog monitor group. The result is displayed.

Rows:

Enter the number of rows for the analog monitor group. The result is displayed.

Unassigned Decoder Channels

Drag a decoder to an available analog monitor.

Monitor image

The white number, if present, displays the logical number of the initial camera. The black number displays the logical number of the decoder.

Right-click an analog monitor image to toggle between single view and quad view. On the

Advanced Configuration page, the Quad View column displays the corresponding setting.

To un-assign a decoder, right-click the analog monitor image and click Clear Monitor.

Advanced Configuration page

i

Main window > Devices > Expand > > Advanced Configuration tab

Allows you to perform the following tasks:

– Configure the logical number of a decoder or decoder channel.

– Enable quad view for decoders that support quad view

Configure the OSD.

Notice!

We do not recommend configuring quad view for H.264 cameras.

Note the following hints on switching the decoder between quad view and single view in the

Operator Client:

– The user can manually switch the decoder back to single view when it is configured as quad view.

– When the decoder is switched to single view or to quad view and a sequence is just running, only the last video stream remains visible.

– When the user switches to quad view, the last cameras that have been displayed on tile

2-4 are reconnected.

This is also valid for trunk lines. There is only one limitation: If the matrix camera cannot

be reconnected, this is ignored without an error message. A black tile is visible.

– When switching to single view, all trunklines that are displayed on tile 2-4 are disconnected. Only the camera number is stored for a later switch to quad view.

Decoder Name

Displays the display name of the decoder.

Network Address

Displays the IP address of the decoder.

Logical Number

Enter the logical number of the decoder. If you enter an already used number, a message is displayed.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

110 en | Devices page

16.16

Bosch Video Management System

Quad

Displays the position of the decoder on the quad view. 1 is left upper corner, 4 is right lower corner.

Quad View

Select the check box to enable quad view for this decoder. On the Settings page, the corresponding analog monitor image displays the quad view. Logical numbers are created automatically. If you want the Operator Client user to be able to switch between quad view and single view, then check Quad View. If you clear Quad View, the Operator Client user cannot switch.

AMG

Displays the analog monitor group that the decoder in this row is assigned to.

Initial Camera

Click to select the camera that is displayed initially on the monitor after having started the

Operator Client. The logical number of the initial camera is displayed as the white number on the monitor image in the Settings page.

OSD Camera Name

Check to display the camera name as OSD.

OSD Camera No.

Check to display the logical number of the camera as OSD.

OSD Position

To set the location of an OSD, select the desired entry.

Monitor Wall page

16.16.1

Main window > Devices >

Allows you to add a monitor wall application. This application allows for controlling the monitor wall hardware from within Operator Client. No server is involved in controlling the monitor wall. This ensures that the user of Operator Client is always able to control the monitor wall even if the Management Server is offline.

See also

Adding a monitor wall, 36

Add Monitor Wall dialog box

Main window > Devices > Right-click > Click Add Monitor Wall

Add the required decoder to your Bosch Video Management System before you add the monitor wall.

Decoder:

Select the decoder that is connected to the monitor wall.

Max. number of monitors:

Type in the number of used decoder channels if you do not want to use all available channels.

If you leave the field empty, the maximum number of channels that is supported by the decoder, is displayed in Operator Client.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.17

Devices page | en 111

Enable thumbnails

Click to check if you want to display a snapshot in Operator Client for each monitor. This snapshot is regularly updated.

See also

Adding a monitor wall, 36

Communication Devices page

16.17.1

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add or configure a communication device.

You can configure the following communication devices:

– E-mail

SMS (GSM or SMSC dial-up provider)

E-mail/SMTP Server dialog box

16.17.2

Main window >

Device command

Devices > Expand > Right-click > Add E-mail/SMTP

Allows you to add an e-mail server to your Bosch Video Management System.

Name:

Type the display name of the e-mail server.

Add SMS Device dialog box

Main window > Devices > Expand command

Allows you to add an SMS device to your system.

> Right-click

Name:

Type the name of the e-mail server that is used for being displayed.

> Add SMS Device

GSM modem

Click to add a GSM modem.

SMSC dial up

Click to add a Hayes compatible modem which can connect to an SMSC provider.

SMTP Server page 16.17.3

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Allows you to configure the e-mail settings of your system. On the Events page, you can assign

an event to an e-mail. When this event occurs, the systems sends an e-mail. You cannot receive

e-mails in Bosch Video Management System.

SMTP Server Name:

Type the name of the e-mail server. You get the information about the required entry from your

provider. Usually this is the IP address or DNS name of your e-mail server.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

112 en | Devices page

16.17.4

Bosch Video Management System

Port:

Type the required network port number for outgoing mails. You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Connection time-out [s]:

Type the number of seconds of inactivity until the connection is disconnected.

Authentification:

Select a check box for the required authentication method. You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Username:

Type the user name for authenticating at the e-mail server. You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Password:

Type the password for authenticating at the e-mail server. You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Send Test E-mail

Click to display the Send Test E-mail dialog box.

Send Test E-mail dialog box

16.17.5

Main window > Devices > Expand button

Allows you to send a test e-mail.

From:

Type the e-mail address of the sender.

To:

Type the e-mail address of the recipient.

Subject:

Type the subject of the e-mail.

Message:

Type the message.

Send Test E-mail

Click to send the e-Mail.

GSM Settings / SMSC Settings page

> Expand > > Send Test E-mail

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Allows you to configure the SMS settings of your Bosch Video Management System. On the

Events page, you can assign an event to a short message. When this event occurs, the system sends a short message. If the number of entered characters exceeds the highest permitted number (usually 160), an SMS is divided into multiple parts.

Device:

Select the required COM port where the external modem is connected to. If your computer has an internal modem, select the corresponding entry.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.18

Devices page | en 113

Speed:

Select the required transfer rate.

Pin: (for GSM device only)

Type the personal identification number for authenticating at the device.

Data format: (for SMSC device only)

Select the required data format. You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Unicode (for GSM device only)

Select the check box to enable unicode characters. This reduces the highest number of permitted characters to 80.

Dial string: (for SMSC device only)

Type the number to connect to the SMSC dial-up provider. You get this number from your provider.

Password: (for SMSC device only)

Type the password that the device needs to connect to the SMSC dial-up provider if required.

You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Protocol: (for SMSC device only)

Select the required protocol that the device uses to connect to the SMSC dial-up provider.

You get the information about the required entry from your provider.

Recipient:

Type the mobile phone number of the recipient of the short messages. Include the country prefix without + sign (e.g. 0049170123456).

Message (max. 160 chars):

Type the text for the short message.

SMS Test Message

Click to send a test short message.

POS + ATM page

16.18.1

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add and configure peripheral devices, for example, a Bosch ATM/POS Bridge.

If you want to add multiple bridges at one server, you must use different ports.

Add Bosch ATM/POS-Bridge dialog box

Main window >

Bridge command

Devices > Expand

Allows you to add a Bosch ATM/POS Bridge.

Name:

Type an appropriate name for the device.

IP address:

Type the IP address of the device.

> Right-click > Add Bosch ATM/POS-

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

114 en | Devices page

16.18.2

Bosch Video Management System

Port 1:

Type the appropriate port number used for transmitting the keep alive signal (every 5 seconds).

Port 2:

Type the appropriate port number used for transmitting messages from the device.

Bosch ATM/POS-Bridge page

16.18.3

Main window >

Bridge tab

Devices > Expand

Allows you to configure a Bosch ATM/POS Bridge.

> Expand > > Bosch ATM/POS-

IP address:

Type the IP address of the device.

Port 1:

Type the appropriate port number used for transmitting the keep alive signal (every 5 seconds).

Port 2:

Type the appropriate port number used for transmitting messages from the device.

Inputs page

16.18.4

Main window > Devices > Expand

Allows you to configure an ATM device.

ATM Settings page

> Expand > > Inputs tab

16.19

Main window > Devices > Expand

Allows you to configure an ATM device.

> Expand

Serial Port:

In the list, select the appropriate port.

Inputs

Select a check box to enable the corresponding input.

Virtual Inputs page

>

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Displays the virtual inputs configured in your system.

Allows you to add new virtual inputs and to delete existing ones.

Add Inputs

Click to display a dialog box for adding new virtual inputs.

Delete Inputs

Click to delete a selected virtual input.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.19.1

Number

Displays the number of the virtual input.

Name

Click a cell to modify the name of the virtual input.

Add Virtual Inputs dialog box

16.20

16.20.1

16.20.2

Devices page | en 115

Main window > Devices > Expand

Allows you to add new virtual inputs.

Start:

Select the first number of the new virtual inputs.

> Add Inputs button

End:

Select the last number of the new virtual inputs.

Name:

Type the name of the new virtual inputs. A consecutive number is appended.

Add

Click to add the new virtual inputs.

SNMP page

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add or configure an SNMP measurement for maintaining the network quality.

Add SNMP dialog box

Main window > Devices > Expand > Right-click > Add SNMP command

Allows you to add a network monitoring system to your Bosch Video Management System.

Name:

Type a name for the network monitoring device.

SNMP Trap Receiver page

i

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Allows you to select devices for monitoring and to select SNMPtrapOIDs that trigger an event

for the selected device when they are received.

Notice!

You must enter the IP address of the Bosch Video Management System Management Server as the trap receiver in your devices that you want to monitor.

SNMP Trap Sending Devices:

Allows you to enter a range of IP addresses of the monitored network devices. To monitor a single device enter the corresponding IP address in the Range From cell.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

116 en | Devices page

16.20.3

Bosch Video Management System

Be careful when changing these addresses. Entering a wrong address stops network monitoring

of this device.

SNMP Trap Filter Rules:

Allows you to enter OIDs and corresponding values. You can use wildcards as * and ? to enhance the filter range. If you enter OIDs and values in more than one row, these filter rules must match simultaneously to trigger an event. In both columns, you can enter a regular expression in {}. If there are characters outside the brackets, the regular expression is not evaluated.

Show Trap Logger Tool

Click to display the SNMP Trap Logger dialog box for tracing SNMP trap OIDs.

SNMP Trap Logger dialog box

Main window > Devices > Expand

Trap Receiver > Click Show Trap Logger Tool

> Expand > Select a generic SNMP

Allows you to trace SNMPtrapOIDs. You can receive traps from all devices in your network or

only from selected ones. You can filter the traps to be received and you can add OIDs and values of selected traps to the SNMP Trap Filter Rules: table.

Start/Pause

Click to start or stop a tracing process.

Only Traps From Sender

Enter the IP address or DNS name of a device. Only traps from this device are traced.

Only Traps Containing

Enter a string a trap can contain. You can use * and ? as wildcards. Strings in {} are treated as regular expressions. Only traps containing such a string are traced.

Received Traps

Displays the traps that are received by a tracing process.

16.21

Click to remove all entries in the Received Traps field.

Trap Details

Displays the trap details. You can copy the OID and the Value entry to the SNMP Trap Filter

Rules: table.

CCTV Keyboards page

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add a CCTV keyboard connected to a Bosch Video Management System workstation or to a decoder.

Add Keyboard

Click to add a row to the table for configuring a keyboard.

Delete Keyboard

Click to remove the selected row.

Keyboard Type

Displays the type of the keyboard that is connected to your workstation.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.22

Devices page | en 117

Connection

In a cell, select the required connection of the keyboard to a workstation or a decoder. If you select a workstation, the keyboard is also added to the

Port

In a cell, select the desired COM port.

> page.

Baudrate

In a cell, select the maximum rate, in bits per second (bps), that you want data to be transmitted through this port. Usually, this is set to the maximum rate supported by the computer or device you are communicating with.

Data bits

Displays the number of data bits you want to use for each character that is transmitted and received.

Stop bits

Displays the time between each character being transmitted (where time is measured in bits).

Parity

Displays the type of error checking you want to use for the selected port.

Port type

Displays the connection type that is used to connect the CCTV keyboard with the workstation.

I/O Modules page

16.22.1

Main window > Devices > Expand

Allows you to add or configure an I/O module.

Currently only ADAM devices are supported.

ADAM page

>

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Displays information on the selected ADAM device.

>

Allows you to change the display name of an ADAM device.

> ADAM tab

ADAM type:

Select the appropriate device type.

Inputs total:

Displays the total number of inputs available with this device type.

Relays/Outputs total:

Displays the total number of relays available with this device type.

Inputs page 16.22.2

Main window > Devices > Expand > > > Inputs tab

Allows you to change the display names of the inputs of the selected ADAM device.

Number

Displays the logical number of the input.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

118 en | Devices page

16.22.3

Name

Click a cell to change the display name of an input.

Relays page

16.23

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Devices > Expand > > > Relays tab

Allows you to change the display names of the relays of the selected ADAM device.

Number

Click a cell to change the logical number of a relay.

Name

Type the display name of the relay.

Allegiant CCL Emulation page

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to activate the Bosch AllegiantCCL emulation. This emulation starts an internal

Bosch VMS service that translates CCL commands of the Matrix Switch into Bosch VMS. You configure a COM port of the Management Server to listen to these CCL commands. The CCL emulation helps to exchange existing Allegiant devices with Bosch Video Management System or to use Bosch Video Management System with applications that support the Allegiant CCL commands.

Allegiant CCL commands supported in Bosch VMS, 196 lists the CCL commands supported in

Bosch Video Management System.

Note:

Do not configure the Allegiant CCL emulation and an Allegiant device to the same COM port. If for both devices the same COM port is configured, the Allegiant device wins. The access of the

Allegiant CCL emulation device fails with an appropriate message.

To solve this, the Management Server must have two different COM ports or connect the

Allegiant device to another computer.

Enable Allegiant CCL Emulation

Select the check box to enable the emulation.

Baud rate

Select the value for the transmission rate in bit/s.

Stop bits

Select the number of stop bits per character.

Parity check

Select the type of parity check.

Interface mode

Select the desired protocol for the serial interface.

Half-duplex mode

Select the setting appropriate for your application.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.24

Mobile Video Service page

16.24.1

Devices page | en 119

Main window > Devices >

Allows you to add a transcoding service to your Bosch Video Management System. This transcoding service adapts the video stream from a camera configured in Bosch Video

Management System to the available network bandwidth. This enables mobile video clients like an iPhone to receive live or playback video data via unreliable network connections with limited bandwidth.

See also

Adding a mobile video service, 38

Add Mobile Video Service dialog box

16.25

Main window > Devices >Right-click > Click Add Mobile Video Service

URI

Type in the URI. Follow the syntax rules of the example:

http://www.MyDomain.org/Mybvms/mvs

See also

Adding a mobile video service, 38

VRM Devices page

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add and configure VRM devices. A VRM device needs at least an encoder, an

iSCSI device, and a LUN assigned to the iSCSI device. See the Release Notes and the data

sheet for current firmware versions. The recording mode of the assigned encoders is set to

VRM when the configuration is activated.

Caution!

After you have added an iSCSI device with respective encoders to your Bosch Video Management System, you must add the IQN of each encoder to this iSCSI device (valid for some iSC-

SI device types).

See Configuring an iSCSI device, 38 for details.

Caution!

Ensure that the time of the VRM computer is synchronized with the Management Server. Otherwise you can loose recordings.

Configure the time server software on the Management Server. On the VRM computer, configure the IP address of the Management Server as time server using standard Windows procedures.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

120 en | Devices page

16.26

VRM Settings page

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Devices > Expand >

VRM Server name

Type a name that is displayed in the device tree of Bosch Video Client.

Server initiator name

Displays the iSCSI initiator name of VRM Server.

System-wide CHAP password

Enter the password that you have configured in the iSCSI storage device. The CHAP password is valid for the VRM and is sent to all devices automatically. Replay clients do not need additional configuration.

Use as failover server / Master server IP address / Password

You can set up a computer as the master server, provided that VRM Server is started on it, and set up another computer as a failover server. The configuration settings of the master server are then synchronized on the failover server. If the master server fails, the failover server automatically takes over the management of the VRM system.

Secondary target block allocation [GB]

Enter the number of 1 GB storage blocks that are allocated to a device on the failover iSCSI target (secondary target). The minimum number of blocks for each device allocated to the secondary target is eight. When carrying out this step, note that each VIP X1600 module is counted as an individual device.

The retention time configured in the system also applies to secondary target blocks.

The number of secondary target blocks for a device should be selected in such a way that there is enough disk space to continue recording for the required length of time if the primary target fails. Depending on the bit rate, you can assume that one block is sufficient for approximately one hour of recording.

Blocks should remain free on the secondary target as a buffer. These are used by the VRM system if the blocks allocated to a device are insufficient.

Calculation example:

– Storage capacity of the failover iSCSI target: 5024 GB

– Number of allocated VIP X1600 devices: 140 (each occupied with four modules)

– Failover block allocation: 8 (minimum)

– Resulting number of allocated failover blocks: 140 x 4 x 8 = 4480

– Resulting number of free failover blocks: 5024 - 4480 = 544

A buffer of 544 GB remains for recordings in case of a failover; this buffer is also available to the allocated devices if required.

Block reservation for VRM Server downtime (days)

Enter the number of days that the assigned encoders will be recorded although the

VRM Server is down.

For example, if you set 4, the encoders will be recorded during approximately 4 days of

VRM Server downtime.

If your system has encoders with low bit rate, you can significantly reduce the pre-allocated disk space.

Recording preferences mode

Automatic: Load balancing is configured automatically. Each encoder is automatically assigned 2 iSCSI targets and blocks on these 2 iSCSI targets are assigned to the encoder.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.26.1

Devices page | en 121

Manual: You can configure load balancing manually in the traditional recording mode.

Sanity check period (days)

Move the slider to configure the required time period. After this time period the iSCSI target is checked and blocks are reassigned if needed.

Advanced page

16.26.2

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Activate the different logs for VRM Server and Configuration Manager, and specify the retention time for log files in days.

The log files for VRM Server are stored on the computer on which VRM Server has been started, and can be viewed or downloaded with VRM Monitor.

The log files for Configuration Manager are stored locally in the following directory:

C:\Documents and Settings\<User>\My Documents\Bosch\Video Recording Manager\Log

Complete memory dump file

Only activate this option if necessary, for example if the Technical Customer Service team requests a complete summary of the main memory.

Telnet support

Activate this option if access with the Telnet protocol is to be supported. Only activate if necessary.

Caution!

Extensive logging requires considerable CPU power and HDD capacity.

Do not use extensive logging in continuous operation.

SNMP page

16.26.3

Main window > Devices > Expand >

1. SNMP host address 2. SNMP host address

VRM supports the SNMP V2 (Simple Network Management Protocol) for managing and monitoring network components, and can send SNMP messages (traps) to IP addresses. The unit supports SNMP MIB II in the unified code. If you wish to send SNMP traps, enter the IP addresses of one or two required target units here.

Some events are sent as SNMP traps only. Refer to the MIB file for descriptions.

iSCSI System Access page

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Allows you to enter a password so that the VRM system can access this iSCSI storage system

for configuration.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

122 en | Devices page

16.26.4

Default Configuration page

16.26.5

!

Bosch Video Management System

Main window >

Configuration tab

Devices > Expand > Expand > Click > Default

Allows you to perform a basic configuration of your iSCSI device. You create LUNs on the iSCSI

hard drive and format these LUNs.

Only displayed if the device is one of the iSCSI storage systems supported by Bosch, for example NetApp.

Capacity [MB]

Information on the total capacity of the storage system.

Number of LUNs

You can change the number of LUNs.

Caution!

If you change the number of LUNs, the entire iSCSI system is reorganized and any sequences saved on the system are lost.

Therefore, before making changes, check the recordings and back up any important sequences.

Initialization status (%)

Additional information is displayed during initialization. When initialization is complete

(100%), you will also have the opportunity to delete all LUNs again.

Note: On NetApp storage systems, it can take several hours before LUNs are fully deleted.

During that time, the total capacity of newly created LUNs can be reduced. You can only create new LUNs with full capacity after the old LUNs have been completely deleted.

RAID-DP (reliability focused)

This option is only displayed for NetApp DSA-N2B20.

Activate this option if you do not wish to use the specified RAID type RAID-4, but would prefer to use the more reliable RAID type RAID-DP.

Load Balancing page

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand > > Load Balancing tab

Set the upper limits for the permitted bit rate and the number of simultaneous iSCSI

connections for each iSCSI system. If these limits are exceeded, data is no longer being

written to the iSCSI system and is lost.

For supported systems (for example Bosch RAID, NetApp, DLA), use the default values. For another device see the documentation of this device. Start testing with small values.

Soft limit

Enter a value smaller or equal to the value in the Hard limit field. If the values are not exceeded, data is written to the iSCSI device without internal reorganization. If they are exceeded but smaller than the values in the Hard limit field, the data is internally reorganized before writing.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.26.6

Devices page | en 123

Hard limit

These values represent a security margin in relation to the soft limit values. If the write accesses are in this range, internal allocation of addressed blocks must be reorganized. This does not affect the current recording.

If this value is also exceeded, the recording is interrupted for a few seconds and the internal allocation of addressed blocks is reorganized.

If the system as a whole does not provide sufficient bandwidth or iSCSI connections for the allocated devices, this can result in recordings being impossible on a regular basis. If this is the case, increase the available overall bandwidth and/or the number of possible iSCSI connections by adding further storage systems, or reduce the number of cameras recording on the iSCSI system.

iqn-Mapper dialog box

16.26.7

Main window >

IQNs

Devices > Expand

Allows you to start the IQN mapping process.

LUNs page

> Expand > Right-click > Map

16.26.8

Main window > Devices > Expand

Allows you to add, remove, or format LUNs.

Add

Click to display the Add LUN dialog box.

> Expand

Remove

Click to remove the selected LUNs. A message box is displayed.

Format LUN

Click to format the selected LUN. A message box is displayed.

Note:

In the Format column, click the check box for the desired LUN.

> Expand

Add LUN dialog box

>

Main window >

Click Add

Allows you to add a LUN.

Devices > Expand

Id

Enter the ID of the desired LUN.

> Expand

Video Streaming Gateway device page

> Expand > >

16.27

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Allows you to add and configure Video Streaming Gateway devices.

>

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

124 en | Devices page

16.28

See also

Adding a Video Streaming Gateway device, 41

Assignment tab (Video Streaming Gateway)

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Allows you to assign cameras to the selected VSG device and to configure the VSG cameras.

Network scan

In the list, select the camera type that you want to display.

Click to assign or de-assign selected cameras to or from VSG.

Note: When you select multiple cameras in the Network scan list, select only cameras of the same type, for example only Bosch cameras or only ONVIF cameras. Otherwise the button is disabled.

Refresh

Click to update the list of scanned cameras.

VSG cameras

Displays the cameras that are assigned to a Video Streaming Gateway device and the lines that are available for assigning a camera.

Add...

Click to display the Add/Edit dialog box for assigning a camera to your Video Streaming

Gateway device. Allows you to configure properties like IP address or protocol settings.

Note: When you add multiple ONVIF cameras in the Network scan list, in the Token list only the common tokens are displayed.

Edit... (only available if you select an entry in the VSG cameras list)

Click to display a dialog box for editing the properties of a VSG camera.

See also

Adding a Bosch camera to a VSG, 42

Add/Edit dialog box (Video Streaming Gateway) 16.29

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

URL

In the list, select the IP address or the URL of the desired VSG device.

Bosch device: IP address or DNS name

ONVIF: URL (starts with http)

User name

Type in the user name for logon to the device, usually service.

Password

Type in the password for logon to the device.

Connect

Click to connect to the device and to assign it to VSG.

When logon is successful, configure the protocol settings if required.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Devices page | en 125

Skip

Click to activate the configuration settings in the Protocol settings group.

This button does not appear, if you configure a camera that was detected by network scan and added by clicking . The button appears, if you select a line in the VSG cameras list and click the Add... or the Edit... button.

Protocol settings

Make the desired protocol settings. Note that the available configuration settings change with the selected entry in the Type list.

Type

Note: The available configuration settings change with the selected entry.

Entry in the Type list

Bosch RCP+

ONVIF

Available configuration settings

Video input

Select the number of the desired camera if you configure a multichannel device.

Stream

Select the number of the stream of the selected camera.

Protocol

TCP

Used for transmission in the Internet and / or for lossless data transmission. Ensures that no data packet gets lost.

Bandwidth requirement can be high.

Use if the device is located behind a Firewall. Does not support multicast.

UDP

Used for connectionless and lightweight data transmission in private networks. Data packets can get lost. Bandwidth requirement can be low.

Supports multicast.

Stream

ONVIF Media Profile

Contains advanced settings including a specific camera including amongst others the encoding settings.

Video source

Contains basic video settings including a specific camera.

Corresponds to a physical video input.

Token

Select a profile number. If you selected Video source, usually only one entry is available.

Name

Displays the display name of the profile if ONVIF Media

Profile is selected. If multiple names are available,

<multiple> is displayed.

Table 16.1: Protocol settings

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

126 en | Devices page

16.30

Bosch Video Management System

VSG Camera Name

Change the camera name if required. This name is used for VRM and for Bosch Video Client.

See also

Adding a Bosch camera to a VSG, 42

Adding an ONVIF camera to a VSG, 42

Recording profiles tab (Video Streaming Gateway)

16.31

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Allows you to switch recording on or off for each VSG camera.

Recording

In the list, select the desired entry.

>

See also

Switching on VSG recording, 43

Multicast tabs (Video Streaming Gateway)

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Allows you to configure multicast for the assigned cameras.

Enable

Click to enable multicast for this camera.

>

Multicast Address

Insert a valid multicast address (in the range 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255).

Type in 1.0.0.0. A unique multicast address is automatically inserted based on the MAC address of the device.

Port

When a firewall is used, enter a port value that is configured as non-blocked port in the firewall.

Streaming

Click to enable continuous multicast streaming to the switch. This means that the multicast connection is not preceded by a RCP+ registration. The encoder streams always all data to the switch. The switch in return (if no IGMP multicast filtering is supported or configured) sends this data to all ports, with the result that the switch will flood.

You need streaming when using a non-Bosch device for receiving a multicast stream.

See also

Configuring multicast for VSG, 43

Advanced tab (Video Streaming Gateway) 16.32

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand

Allows you to activate logging for Video Streaming Gateway.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual

>

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

16.33

Live Only page

16.33.1

Devices page | en 127

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add and configure encoders used for live only. You can add Bosch encoders and

ONVIF network video transmitters.

ONVIF Encoder page

16.33.2

16.34

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Displays information on a live only ONVIF network video transmitter added to your Bosch

Video Management System.

Name

Displays the name of the ONVIF device. You can rename it in the Device Tree directly.

Network Address

Displays the IP address of the device.

Video Inputs

Displays the number of cameras connected to this encoder.

See also

Adding a local storage or live only device, 40

Add ONVIF dialog box

Main window > Devices > Right-click

Network Address

Type in the IP address of your ONVIF encoder.

> Click Add ONVIF Encoder

Number of video inputs

Type in the number of cameras connected to this encoder.

See also

Adding a local storage or live only device, 40

Local Storage page

Main window > Devices > Expand >

Allows you to add and configure encoders with local storage.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

128 en | Encoders / Decoders page

17 Encoders / Decoders page

The count of items below an entry is displayed in square brackets.

To configure an encoder:

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > or

Devices > Expand > Expand > Expand

Main window > or

Devices > Expand

Main window >

To configure a decoder:

Devices > >

> Expand >

>

17.1

17.1.1

Main window > Devices > Expand > Expand >

Most of the settings on the encoder/ decoder pages are active immediately after you click

. If you click another tab without clicking and changes have occurred, two corresponding message boxes are displayed. Confirm them both if you want to save.

To change the access password right-click the device icon and click Change password....

To display the device in a Web browser right-click the device icon and click Show Webpage in

Browser.

Note:

Depending on the selected encoder or camera, not all pages described here are available for each device. The wording used here for describing the field labels can deviate from your software.

4 Click a tab to display the corresponding property page.

Main Settings > Unit Access page

Identification / Camera identification

Device name

Type the name of the device.

The name simplifies the management of multiple devices in large systems. The name is used for identification of a device. Use a name that makes it as easy as possible to identify its location.

Do not use any special characters in the name. Special characters are not supported and may cause problems, e.g. with playback.

Click to update the name in the Device Tree.

Device ID

Type the ID of the device.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Encoders / Decoders page | en 129

17.1.2

Camera ID

Type the ID of the camera.

Initiator name

Displays the iSCSI initiator name. The initiator name is automatically displayed after a connection is established.

Initiator extension

Type your own text to make the unit easier to identify in large iSCSI systems. This text is added to the initiator name, separated from it by a full stop.

Camera name

Camera

Type the name of the camera. Ensure that Camera 1 is allocated to Video Input 1, Camera 2 to

Video Input 2, etc.

The camera name facilitates the identification of the remote camera location, for example in case of an alarm. Use a name that makes it as easy as possible to identify the location.

Do not use any special characters in the name. Special characters are not supported and may cause problems, for example the play back of recordings. The settings on this page apply to all camera inputs.

Click to update the name in the Device Tree.

17.1.3

17.2

17.3

17.3.1

Version information

Hardware version

Displays the version of the hardware.

Firmware version

Displays the version of the firmware.

Main Settings > Date/Time page

If there are multiple units operating in your system or network, it is necessary to synchronize their internal clocks.

Device date format Device date Device time

If there are multiple devices operating in your system or network, it is important to synchronize their internal clocks. For example, it is only possible to identify and correctly evaluate simultaneous recordings when all devices are operating on the same time.

Synchr. PC

Click to apply the system time from your computer to the device.

Device time zone

Select your time zone from the list.

Daylight saving time

Set by Bosch VMS Management Server.

Time server IP address

Set by Bosch VMS Management Server.

Time server type

Set by Bosch VMS Management Server. Default setting is SNTP .

Advanced Settings > Video Input page

Picture settings

Allows you to adjust each video image to your requirements. All changes are displayed immediately. Be aware that changes in the image quality affects processor performance.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

130 en | Encoders / Decoders page Bosch Video Management System

17.3.2

17.3.3

17.4

Video

Enter the number of the camera you want to adjust. If you want to do this for each camera, enter the number of the camera, adjust the settings (brightness, contrast, etc.), and then enter the next camera number, and adjust their settings.

Brightness

Enter the value to adjust the brightness of the video image to your working environment.

Contrast

Enter the value to adjust the contrast of the video image to your working environment.

Saturation

Enter the value to adjust the color saturation of the video image on your monitor as realistic as possible.

Low-pass filter

Enter the value to remove very fine noise from the image. This reduces and optimizes the bandwidth necessary for the image transmission over the network. The image resolution may be impaired. The higher the value, the flatter the image signal.

Default

Click to change the current settings to the factory settings.

Show Image

Click to display the image window of the encoder. In the menu bar of the video image you can select the video input that you want to display.

Input termination

Allows you to activate or deactivate the 75 Ohm terminating resistor for each video input.

The numbering follows the labeling of the video inputs on the device. Every video input is closed at the time of delivery.

75 Ohm termination

Select one of the following:

Off: Deactivates the 75 Ohm terminating resistor and loops through the video signal.

On: Activates the 75 Ohm terminating resistor. No loop through of the video signal.

Source type

Allows you to connect video recorders as video source. Video recorders require a more tolerant setting as a result of unwanted effects caused by the mechanical components of a video recorder.

Input 1-Input 4

Select VCR to connect video recorders as video source. Select Camera to connect cameras.

In some cases, selecting VCR also for cameras can lead to an improvement in the video image.

Advanced Settings > Recording Management page

Active recordings are indicated by .

Point to the icon. Detailed information about the active recordings are displayed.

Management mode

Specify how the device's recordings should be managed:

– Recordings manually managed

The recordings are managed locally on the device. All relevant settings must be carried out manually. The device is removed from the VRM system.

If activated, no further settings are required on this page.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Encoders / Decoders page | en 131

17.5

– Recording 1 managed by VRM

The recordings of this device are managed by the VRM system, which is considered external from the point of view of the device.

If activated, no further settings are required on this page.

– Recording 1 managed by VRM - Recording 2 used for ANR

Not supported.

Recording media

You can record the images on various local storage media or on an appropriately configured iSCSI system. For long-term, authoritative images in stationary operation, it is essential that you use an appropriately sized iSCSI system.

Select the required recording media.

iSCSI Media

– iSCSI IP address

Type the IP address of the required iSCSI destination.

– Password

Type the password for iSCSI media.

– Read

Click to establish the connection to the IP address. In the Storage overview, the corresponding logical drives are displayed.

– Add

Click to add a media to the Managed storage media list.

– Remove

Click to remove a media from the Managed storage media list.

Managed storage media

The managed storage media are displayed.

Overwrite older recordings

Recording 1 / Recording 2: If activated, the oldest recordings are deleted as soon as the medium is full. A loop recording process occurs.

If not activated, nothing more is saved to the medium once it is full.

Advanced Settings > Recording preferences page

The Recording preferences page is displayed for each encoder. This page only appears if a device is assigned to a VRM system.

[MISSINGDISPLAYTEXT: 000357BB_CameraEditor_Mode_0: Mode]

Select the required option.

– All

The VRM system discovers all available and configured iSCSI targets and displays the available capacity automatically. If a target fails or memory capacity is used, another target is selected automatically. In this case, you cannot enter targets on the tab.

– Restricted

Recordings are stored primarily to the targets entered here. Primary target and secondary target are used equivalently.

If no disk space is available on either of the targets entered, other storage blocks of the

VRM system are used until there is space available again on the entered targets.

– Failover

Recordings are saved only to primary target. If it is not possible to save to this target, the recording will be saved to the target entered under secondary target.

You can leave the second list empty. In this case no failover is possible but the number of required iSCSI sessions is reduced.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

132 en | Encoders / Decoders page Bosch Video Management System

17.6

– Preferred

Recordings are saved to the entered targets in the specified sequence. For this, enter both a primary and a secondary target. The secondary target is only used while the primary target has no storage capacity available.

Only if these targets are not available, the recordings will be distributed across other targets.

Primary target

Select the entry for the required target, if you have selected a setting other than All under

[MISSINGDISPLAYTEXT: 000357BB_CameraEditor_Mode_0: Mode].

Secondary target

Select the entry for the required target if you have selected Failover under

[MISSINGDISPLAYTEXT: 000357BB_CameraEditor_Mode_0: Mode].

If you have selected Restricted, Failover, or Preferred, entering a secondary target is optional. Restricted and Preferred without a second target are identical.

Advanced Settings > VCA page

The device contains an integrated Video Content Analysis (VCA), which can detect and analyze changes in the signal using image processing algorithms. Such changes are triggered by motion in the camera's field of view.

If there is not enough computing power, priority is given to live images and recordings. This can lead to impairment of the VCA system. Observe the processor load and optimize the settings of the device or the VCA settings, if necessary.

VCA configuration

You can configure profiles with different VCA configurations. You can save profiles on your computer's hard drive and load saved profiles from there. This can be useful if you want to test a number of different configurations. Save a functioning configuration and test new settings. You can use the saved configuration to restore the original settings at any time.

4 Select a VCA profile and change the settings if necessary.

To rename the VCA profile:

4

Click . The Edit dialog box is displayed. Type the new name, and then click OK.

Preset

Select the preset if required.

Alarm status

Displays the current alarm state to check the effects of your settings immediately.

Aggregation time [s]

You can set an aggregation time of between 0 and 20 seconds if necessary. The aggregation time always starts when an event occurs. All following events that occur during the aggregation time are counted as one event. This ensures that events following in quick succession do not trigger many alarms. During the aggregation time no further event is counted.

The post-alarm time set for alarm recordings only starts once the aggregation time has expired.

Analysis type

Select the analysis algorithm. By default, only MOTION+ is available. MOTION+ offers a motion detector and essential tamper detection functionality.

Additional analysis algorithms with comprehensive functions, such as IVA, are available from

Bosch Security Systems.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Encoders / Decoders page | en 133

17.6.1

17.6.2

Metadata is always created for a video content analysis, unless this was explicitly excluded.

Depending on the analysis type selected and the relevant configuration, additional information overlays the video image in the preview window next to the parameter settings. With the

MOTION+ analysis type, for example, the sensor fields in which motion is recorded will be marked with rectangles.

Motion detector

See Motion detector (MOTION+ only), 133.

Tamper detection

See Tamper detection, 134

Load...

Click to load a saved profile. The the Open dialog box is displayed. Select the filename of the profile you want to load, and then click OK.

Save...

Click to save the profile settings to another file. The Save dialog box is displayed. Type the filename, select the folder where to save the file, and then click OK.

Default

Click to return all settings to their default values.

Motion detector (MOTION+ only)

Reflections of light (from glass surfaces, etc.), lights switching on and off, or changes in the light level caused by cloud movement on a sunny day can trigger unintended responses from the motion detector and generate false alarms. For indoor surveillance, ensure constant lighting of the areas during the day and at night. Run a series of tests at different times of the day and night to ensure that the video sensor is operating as intended.

Debounce time 1s (MOTION+ only)

The debounce time is intended to prevent very brief events from triggering individual alarms. If the Debounce time 1s option is activated, an event must last at least 1 second to trigger an alarm.

Select Area...

Click to configure the areas to be monitored by the motion detector. The Select Area dialog box is displayed.

See Select Area dialog box, 133.

Sensitivity (only with MOTION+ functionality)

Move the slider to adjust the sensitivity of the motion detector. The motion detector reacts to variations in the brightness of the video image. The darker the observation area, the higher the value that must be selected.

Minimum object size (only with MOTION+ functionality)

Specify the number of sensor fields that a moving object must cover to generate an alarm.

This settings prevents small objects from triggering an alarm.

A minimum value of 4 is recommended. This value corresponds to four sensor fields.

Select Area dialog box

This dialog box displays the camera image. Within this window you can activate the areas of the image to be monitored.

To activate an area:

In the camera image, drag over the area you want to activate. Activated areas are marked yellow.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

134 en | Encoders / Decoders page

17.6.3

Bosch Video Management System

To deactivate an area:

In the camera image, press the SHIFT key and click the area you want to deactivate.

To obtain commands in the window:

To see the commands for activating or deactivating the areas, right-click anywhere in the window. The following commands are available:

– Undo

Undoes the last command.

– Set All

Activates the entire camera image.

– Clear All

Deactivates the entire camera image.

– Tool

Defines the shape of the mouse pointer.

– [MISSINGDISPLAYTEXT: 000357BB_DeviceResourceView_Settings_0: Settings]

Displays the Editor Settings dialog box. In this dialog box you can change the sensitivity and the minimum object size.

Tamper detection

You can detect tampering of cameras and video cables by means of various options. Run a series of tests at different times of the day and night to ensure that the video sensor is operating as intended.

The options for tamper detection can only be set for fixed cameras. Dome cameras or other motorized cameras cannot be protected in this manner as the movement of the camera itself causes changes in the video image that are too great.

Scene too bright

Select the check box if tampering associated with exposure to extreme light (for instance, shining a flashlight directly on the lens) should trigger an alarm. The average brightness of the scene provides a basis for recognition.

Global change

Select the check box if the changes, set with the Global change slider, should lead to trigger an alarm.

Move the slider to set how large the changes in the video image must be for an alarm to be triggered. Set a high value if changes that occur simultaneously in few areas should lead to trigger an alarm. Set a low value if changes that occur simultaneously in a large number of areas should lead to trigger an alarm. This setting allows you to detect, independently of motion alarms, manipulation of the orientation or location of a camera resulting from turning the camera mount bracket.

This setting is independent of the areas selected in the Select Area window (see Select Area

dialog box, 133).

Scene too dark

Select the check box if tampering associated with covering the lens (for instance, by spraying paint on the lens) should trigger an alarm. The average brightness of the scene provides a basis for recognition.

Scene too noisy

Select the check box if tampering associated with EMC interference (noisy scene as the result of a strong interference signal in the vicinity of the video lines) should trigger an alarm.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.7

17.8

Advanced Settings > Audio Alarm page

Encoders / Decoders page | en 135

Some encoders can create alarms on the basis of audio signals. You can configure signal strengths and frequency ranges in such a way that false alarms, for example due to machine noise or background noise, are avoided.

Note: First set up normal audio transmission before you configure the audio alarm.

See Camera > Audio page, 142

Audio alarm

Select On if you want the device to generate audio alarms.

Name

Enter a unique and clear name. The name makes it easier to identify the alarm in extensive video monitoring systems.

Caution!

Do not use any special characters, for example &, in the name.

Special characters are not supported by the internal recording management and may therefore result in the Bosch VMS Archive Player being unable to play back the recording.

Signal Ranges

You can exclude particular signal ranges in order to avoid false alarms. For this reason the total signal is divided into 13 tonal ranges (mel scale). Select or clear the boxes below the graphic to include or exclude individual ranges.

Threshold

Set up the threshold on the basis of the signal visible in the graphic You can set the threshold using the slide control or, alternatively, you can move the white line directly in the graphic using the mouse.

Sensitivity

You can use this setting to adapt the sensitivity to the sound environment. You can effectively suppress individual signal peaks. A high value represents a high level of sensitivity.

Advanced Settings > Alarm Rules page

The device features an alarm rule engine. In its simplest form, an alarm rule can define which input activate which output. Basically, an alarm rule allows you to customize a device to automatically respond to different alarm inputs.

Enabled

Select the check box to activate the alarm.

[MISSINGDISPLAYTEXT: 000357BB_G4adAlarmRules_Input #_0: Input]

Select an entry.

Local Input 1: a physical alarm connection.

Local Input 2: a physical alarm connection.

– IVA/MOTION+: An alarm when IVA or motion detection is activated.

Connection: An alarm when an attempt is made to access the camera’s IP address.

Output 1 / Output 2

Select an entry for each output.

None: no defined command.

Aux On: Defines a standard or custom keyboard ON command.

Aux Off: Defines a standard or custom keyboard OFF command.

Shot: Defines a preset scene from shot 1-64.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

136 en | Encoders / Decoders page

17.9

i

Camera > Display Stamping page

Bosch Video Management System

Notice!

Not supported in Bosch Video Management System.

This function allows you to display important supplementary information in the video image.

These information can be enabled individually.

Camera name stamping

Set the position of the camera name overlay.

Click the item you want to select.

– Off

No camera name is displayed in the video image.

– Bottom

The camera name is displayed at the bottom of the video image.

– Top

The camera name is displayed on the top of the video image.

– Custom

Enter the position where the camera name is displayed in the video image.

Time stamping

Sets the position of the time overlay.

Click the item you want to select.

– Off

No time and date is displayed in the video image.

– Bottom

The time and date is displayed at the bottom of the video image.

– Top

The time and date is displayed on the top of the video image.

– Custom

Enter the position where the time and date is displayed in the video image.

Display milliseconds

If necessary, you can also display milliseconds. This information can be useful for recorded video images; however, it does increase the processor's computing time.

Click the item you want to select.

– On

Milliseconds are displayed in the video image.

– Off

Milliseconds are not displayed in the video image.

Alarm mode stamping

If necessary, a text message is displayed in the image in case of an alarm.

– On

A text message is displayed in the video image.

– Off

No text message is displayed in the video image.

– Custom

Enter the position where the text message is displayed in the video image.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.10

Encoders / Decoders page | en 137

Displayed alarm message

Type the message to be displayed in case of an alarm. The maximum text length is

31 characters.

Click the item you want to select.

– On

In case of an alarm a message is displayed in the video image.

– Off

No alarm message is displayed in the video image.

– Custom

Enter the position where a message is displayed in the video image.

Title OSD

OSD titles can be displayed at a position of your choice.

– On

Continuously displays sector or shot title overlays in the image. Enter the position.

– Off

Does not displays sector or shot title overlays in the image.

– Momentary

Continuously displays sector or shot title overlays in the image for a few seconds. Enter the position.

Camera OSD

Displays camera information, such as Digital Zoom, Iris open/close, and Focus near/far overlays in the image.

– On

Displays camera information in the window. Enter the position.

– Off

Does not display camera information in the window.

Video watermarking

Allows you to provide the transmitted images with a watermark.

– On

Activates watermarking. After activation, all images are marked with a green W. A red W indicates that the sequence (live or saved) has been manipulated.

After activation, all images are marked with an icon.

– Off

No watermarking.

Camera > Privacy Masks page

Privacy Masking is used to block out an area of a scene from being viewed and recorded. For example, you might want to hide public places adjacent to your property. You can define

15 privacy masks in total.

Hide masks

To hide all masks from an image view, select the check box.

Privacy masks

Select the privacy mask number. The preview window displays a gray rectangle in the scene.

Enabled

Select the check box to activate the privacy mask. After saving, the content inside the privacy mask is no longer visible in the preview. This area is blocked out from being viewing and recording.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

138 en | Encoders / Decoders page Bosch Video Management System

17.11

Pattern

Pattern of the privacy mask.

Preview window

If necessary, change the size of the privacy mask area and move it to the position you want.

Camera > Camera page

White Balance

Adjusts the color settings to maintain the quality of the white areas of the image.

ATW: Allows the camera to continuously adjust color reproduction.

Indoor: White balance tracking for indoor use.

Outdoor: White balance tracking for outdoor use.

AWB Hold: Places the ATW on hold and saves the color settings.

Extended ATW (default): Allows the camera to constantly adjust for optimal color reproduction.

Manual: Red and Blue gain can be manually set to a desired position.

Red Gain

The red gain adjustment offsets the factory white point alignment (reducing red introduces more cyan).

Blue Gain

The blue gain adjustment offsets the factory white point alignment (reducing blue introduces more yellow). It is only necessary to change the white point offset for special scene conditions.

Gain Control

Adjusts the automatic gain control (AGC). Automatically sets the gain to the lowest possible value needed to maintain a good picture.

Fixed: no enhancement. This setting disables the Max. Gain Level option.

If you select this option, for example the AutoDome Junior HD makes the following changes automatically:

Night Mode: Switches to value Color.

Auto Iris: Switches to value Constant.

– AGC (default): electronically brightens dark scenes, which may cause graininess in low light scenes

Max Gain Level

Controls the maximum value the gain can have during AGC operation. To set the maximum gain level, choose from:

– Normal

– Medium

– High

Sharpness

Adjusts the sharpness of the picture. To set the sharpness, type a value between 1 and 15 inclusive. The default setting is 12.

Shutter Mode

Off: Turns the Auto SensUP off.

Auto SensUp: Increases camera sensitivity by increasing the integration time on the CCD.

This is accomplished by integrating the signal from a number of consecutive video frames to reduce signal noise.

If you select this option, for example the AutoDome Junior HD makes the following change automatically:

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.12

17.12.1

Encoders / Decoders page | en 139

Auto Iris: Switches to value Constant.

Shutter

Adjusts the electronic shutter speed (AES). Controls the time period for which light is gathered by the collecting device. The default setting is 1x (60 Hz: 1/30, 50 Hz: 1/25)

Auto SensUp Maximum

Sets the Auto SensUp minimum value. The Auto SensUp Min. value is the factor by which the sensitivity of the camera is increased. The default setting is 15x

Backlight Comp

On: Optimizes the video level for the selected area of the image. Parts outside this area may be underexposed or overexposed.

Off: default setting

Stabilization

On: Turns on video stabilization.

Off: Turns off video stabilization.

Night Mode

Selects night mode (Black/White) to enhance lighting in low light scenes. Select from the following options:

Monochrome: Forces the camera to stay in Night Mode and transmit monochrome images.

Color: The camera does not switch to Night Mode regardless of ambient light conditions.

Auto: The camera switches out of Night Mode after the ambient light level reaches a predefined threshold.

Night Mode Threshold

Adjusts the level of light at which the camera automatically switches out of night mode (B/W) operation. Select a value between 10 and 55 (in increments of 5), where 10 is earlier and 55 is later.

Camera > Lens page

Focus

Autofocus

Continuously adjusts the lens automatically to the correct focus for the sharpest picture.

One push (default): Activates the Auto Focus feature after the camera stops moving.

Once focused, Auto Focus is inactive until the camera is moved again.

Auto focus: Auto Focus is always active.

Manual: Auto Focus is inactive.

Focus Polarity

Normal (default): Focus controls operate normally.

Reverse: Focus controls are reversed.

Focus Speed

Controls how fast the Auto focus will readjust when the focus becomes blurred. Select from the following options:

– Super slow

– Slow

– Medium

– Fast

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

140 en | Encoders / Decoders page

17.12.2

17.12.3

17.13

Bosch Video Management System

Iris

Auto Iris

Automatically adjusts the lens to allow the correct illumination of the camera sensor. This type of lens is recommended for use when there are low light or changing light conditions.

Constant (default): Camera constantly adjusts to varying light conditions.

If you select this option, for example the AutoDome Junior HD makes the following changes automatically:

Gain Control: switches to AGC

Shutter Mode: switches to Normal

Manual: Camera must be manually adjusted to compensate for varying light conditions.

Iris Polarity

Capability to reverse the operation of the iris button on the controller.

Normal (default): Iris controls operate normally.

Reverse: Iris controls are reversed.

Auto Iris Level

Increases or decreases brightness according to the amount of light. Type a value between 1 and 15, inclusive. The default setting is 8.

Iris Speed

Controls how fast the Iris will adjust the opening according to the illumination of the scene.

Type a value between 1 and 10, inclusive. The default setting is 5.

Zoom

Max Zoom Speed

Controls the zoom speed. Default setting: Fast

Zoom Polarity

Capability to reverse the operation of the zoom button on the controller.

Normal (default): Zoom controls operate normally.

Reverse: Zoom controls are reversed.

Digital Zoom

Digital zoom is a method of decreasing (narrowing) the apparent angle of view of a digital video image. It is accomplished electronically, without any adjustment of the camera's optics, and no optical resolution is gained in the process.

Off (default): Enables the Digital Zoom feature.

On: Disables the Digital Zoom feature.

Camera > PTZ page

Auto Pan Speed

Continuously pans the camera at a speed between right and left limit settings. Type a value between 1 and 60 (expressed in degrees), inclusive. The default setting is 30.

Inactivity

Selects the time period the dome must be not controlled until the inactivity event will be executed.

Off (default): Camera remains on a current scene indefinitely.

Scene 1: Camera returns to Preset 1.

Previous Aux: Camera returns to the previous activity.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.14

17.15

17.16

Encoders / Decoders page | en 141

Inactivity Period

Determines the behavior of the dome when the control for dome is inactive. Select a time period from the pull-down list (3 sec. - 10 min.). The default setting is 2 minutes.

Auto Pivot

The Auto Pivot tilts the camera through the vertical position as the camera is rotated to maintain the correct orientation of the image.

Set the Auto Pivot to On (default) to automatically rotate the camera 180º when following a subject traveling directly beneath the camera. To disable this feature, click Off.

Freeze Frame

Select On (default) to freeze the image while the camera moves to a predetermined scene position.

Tilt up limit

Click Set, to set the upper tilt limit of the camera.

Tilt limits

Click Reset to clear the upper tilt limit.

Camera > Prepositions and Tours page

Allows you to define the individual scenes and a preposition tour comprised of the defined scenes.

To add scenes:

Click .

To delete scenes:

Select the scene, then click .

To overwrite (save) scenes:

Click .

To view scenes:

Select the scene, then click .

Include in standard tour (marked with *)

Select the check box if the scene should be part of the preposition tour. The asterisk (*) on the left of the scene name indicates this.

Camera > Sectors page

Sector

The pan capability (for example for the AutoDome Junior HD camera) is 360° and is divided into eight equal sectors. This allows you to apply a title for each sector and to designate any sectors as a Blanked Sector.

To define a title for sectors:

1.

Place the pointer in the input box to the right of the sector number.

2.

Type a title for the sector, up to 20 characters long.

3.

To blank the sector, click the check box to the right of the sector title.

Camera > Installer Menu page

Main frequency

Sets the frequency of the incoming power supply. This setting is made at the factory and should not be changed.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

142 en | Encoders / Decoders page

17.17

17.18

17.19

Bosch Video Management System

Orientation

Reverses the image 180º (ideal when mounting upside down). Set the orientation to Normal

(default) or Inverted.

SC settings

Click Default to restore all cameras settings to their original defaults.

SC data

Click Default to clear all preposition, privacy mask, and other user settings.

Camera > Misc page

Address

Allows the appropriate device to be operated via the numerical address in the control system.

Type a number between 0000 and 9999, inclusive, to identify the camera.

Camera > Logs page

This page allows you to display and to save log files.

Download

Click to obtain the log file information. The log files are displayed in the overview.

Save

Click to save the log files.

Camera > Audio page

This function allows you to set the gain of the audio signals to suit your specific requirements.

The current video image is shown in the small window next to the slide controls to help you check the selected audio source and improve assignments. Your changes are effective immediately.

The numbering of the audio inputs follows the labeling on the device and the assignment to the respective video inputs. The assignment cannot be changed for Web browser connections.

Audio

The audio signals are sent in a separate data stream parallel to the video data, and so increase the network load. The audio data are encoded according to G.711 and require an additional bandwidth of approximately 80 kbps for each connection.

On: Transmits audio data.

Off: No transmission of audio data.

Line In 1 - Line In 4

Enter the value of the gain of the audio signal. Make sure that the display of the slider remains green.

Line Out

Enter the value of the gain. Make sure that the display of the slider remains green.

Microphone (MIC)

Enter the value of the gain for the microphone.

[MISSINGDISPLAYTEXT: 000357BB_Audio_Line OutSpeaker (SPK)_0: Line Out/Speaker

(SPK)]

Enter the value of the gain of the line and the loudspeaker.

Recording format

Select a format for audio recording.

G.711: default value.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.20

17.21

17.21.1

Encoders / Decoders page | en 143

L16: Select L16 if you want better audio quality with higher sampling rates. This requires approximately eight times the G.711 bandwidth.

Interfaces > Relay page

This function allows you to configure the switching behavior of the relay outputs.

You can configure the switching behavior of the relay outputs. For each relay, you can specify an open switch relay (normally closed contact) or a closed switch relay (normally open contact).

You can also specify whether an output should operate as a bistable or monostable relay. In bistable mode, the triggered state of the relay is maintained. In monostable mode, you can set the time after which the relay returns to the idle state.

You can select different events that automatically activate an output. It is possible, for example, to turn on a floodlight by triggering a motion alarm and then turning the light off again when the alarm has stopped.

Idle state

Select Open if you want the relay to operate as an NO contact, or select Closed if the relay is to operate as an NC contact.

Operating mode

Select an operating mode for the relay.

For example, if you want an alarm-activated lamp to stay on after the alarm ends, select the

Bistable entry. If you wish an alarm-activated siren to sound for ten seconds, select the 10 s entry.

Relay follows

If required, select a specific event that will trigger the relay. The following events are possible triggers:

Off: Relay is not triggered by events

Connection: Trigger whenever a connection is made

Video alarm: Trigger by interruption of the video signal at the corresponding input

Motion alarm: Trigger by motion alarm at the corresponding input, as configured on the VCA page.

Local input: Trigger by the corresponding external alarm input

Remote input: Trigger by remote station's corresponding switching contact (only if a connection exists)

Note:

The numbers in the lists of selectable events relate to the corresponding connections on the device, Video alarm 1, for example to the Video In 1 connection.

Trigger relay

Click the relay button to trigger the relay manually (for example, for testing purposes or to activate a door opener).

The relay button displays the state of each relay.

Red: Relay is activated.

Blue: Relay is not activated.

Interfaces > Periphery page

COM1

This function allows you to configure the serial interface parameters according to your requirements.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

144 en | Encoders / Decoders page Bosch Video Management System

17.22

If the device is working in multicast mode, the first remote location to establish a video connection to the device is also assigned the transparent data connection. However, after about 15 seconds of inactivity the data connection is automatically terminated and another remote location can exchange transparent data with the device.

Serial port function

Select a controllable device from the list. Select Transparent data to transmit transparent data via the serial port. Select Terminal to operate the device from a terminal.

After selecting a device, the remaining parameters in the window are set automatically and should not be changed.

Baud rate (bps)

Select the value for the transmission rate.

Stop bits

Select the number of stop bits per character.

Parity check

Select the type of parity check.

Interface mode

Select the protocol for the serial interface.

Network > Network Access page

The settings on this page are used to integrate the device into an existing network.

Note:

After changing the Subnet mask and/or the Gateway address, restart the computer.

Subnet mask:

Type the subnet mask number of the device obtained from your network administrator.

Gateway address

Type the IP address for the gateway to connect the device to a remote location in a different subnet. Otherwise, this box can remain empty (0.0.0.0).

DNS server address

Type the IP address of the DNS server for this device.

Units listed on a DNS server are easier to access. To establish an Internet connection to the device, it is sufficient to enter the name of the device - used in the DNS server - as URL in the browser. Secure and dynamic DNS servers are supported.

Video transmission

Select TCP as protocol for units used behind firewalls. Select UDP for units used in a local network.

Note:

UDP supports multicast. TCP does not. The Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) value in UDP

mode is 1514 bytes.

– Bosch VMS NVR only supports UDP.

HTTP browser port

Select the HTTP browser port from the list. The default port is 80. To limit connection to

HTTPS, deactivate the HTTP port. To do this, select Off.

HTTPS browser port

Not supported.

RCP+ port 1756

Select On to allow unencrypted connections on this port. Select Off to allow only encrypted connections (not supported).

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.23

17.23.1

17.23.2

Encoders / Decoders page | en 145

Telnet support

Select On to allow unencrypted connections on this port. Select Off to allow only encrypted connections (not supported).

Interface mode ETH 1 / Interface mode ETH 2

If necessary select the value for the interface, for example 100 Mbps HD. This value is device dependent and must be set individually.

Network MSS [Byte]

Enter the maximum segment size (MSS) for the IP packet's user data.

This setting allows you to adjust the size of the data packets to the network environment and to optimize data transmission. Observe the MTU value of 1514 bytes in UDP mode.

iSCSI MSS [Byte]

Enter the Maximum Segment Size (MSS) for a connection to the iSCSI system.

The maximum segment size for a connection to the iSCSI system can be higher than for the other data traffic via the network. The size depends on the network structure. A higher value is only useful if the iSCSI system is located in the same subnet as the device.

MAC address

Displays the MAC address.

Network > Advanced page

SNMP

The device supports the SNMP V2 (Simple Network Management Protocol) for managing and

monitoring network components, and can send SNMP messages (traps) to IP addresses. The device supports SNMP MIB II in the unified code.

SNMP

Select On to activate the SNMP function.

1. SNMP host address / 2. SNMP host address

Type the IP addresses of one or two target units. The device (for example encoder, camera)

sends SNMP traps automatically to the target units.

If you do not enter IP addresses, the device only replies to SNMP requests and does not send

SNMP traps to the target units.

SNMP traps

Allows you to select which traps the device sends to the target units. To do this, click Select.

The SNMP traps dialog box is displayed.

SNMP traps dialog box

Select the check boxes of the appropriate traps, and then click OK.

802.1x

IEEE 802.1x allows you to communicate with the device if a RADIUS server is used in a

network.

Authentication

Select On to activate 802.1x.

Identity

Type the user name that the RADIUS server uses for identifying the device.

Password

Type the password that the RADIUS server uses for identifying the device.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

146 en | Encoders / Decoders page Bosch Video Management System

17.23.3

17.23.4

17.23.5

17.23.6

17.23.7

17.24

Encryption

A special license, with which you will receive a corresponding activation key, is required to encrypt user data. You can enter the activation key to release the function on the Licenses page.

See also:

Service > Licenses page, 148

RTSP

RTSP port

If necessary, select a different port for the exchange of the RTSP data. The default port is 554.

Off disables the RTSP function.

NTCIP

Specifies a set of rules and protocols for organizing, describing and exchanging transportation management information between transportation management applications and transportation equipment such that they interoperate with each other.

NTCIP

Select a port from the list.

Address

Select the address from the list.

UPnP

You can activate the universal plug and play function (UPnP). When activated the camera reacts on requests from the network and will be registered automatically as a new network device on the inquiring computers. The access to the camera is then possible using the

Windows file explorer, and without knowledge of the camera’s IP address.

Note:

In order to use the UPnP function on a computer with Windows XP or Windows Vista, the

Universal Plug and Play Device Host and the SSDP Discovery services must be activated.

TCP metadata input

This feature allows a device to receive data from an external TCP sender, for example an ATM or POS device, and store it as metadata.

TCP port

Select the port for TCP communication. Select Off to deactivate the TCP metadata function.

Sender IP address

Type the IP address of the TCP metadata sender here.

Network > Multicast page

In addition to a 1:1 connection between an encoder and a single receiver (unicast), the device

enables multiple receivers to receive the video signal from an encoder simultaneously.

The device either duplicates the data stream itself and then distributes it to multiple receivers

(Multi-unicast) or it sends a single data stream to the network, where the data stream is simultaneously distributed to multiple receivers in a defined group (Multicast). You can enter a dedicated multicast address and port for each stream.

The prerequisite for multicast operation is a multicast-capable network that uses the UDP and

IGMP protocols. Other group management protocols are not supported. The TCP protocol does not support multicast connections.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Encoders / Decoders page | en 147

A special IP address (class D address) must be configured for multicast operation in a multicast-enabled network. The network must support group IP addresses and the Internet

Group Management Protocol (IGMP V2). The address range is from 225.0.0.0 to

239.255.255.255. The multicast address can be the same for multiple streams. However, it is then necessary to use a different port in each case so that multiple data streams are not sent simultaneously using the same port and the same multicast address.

Note: The settings must be done for each encoder (video input) and for each stream individually. The numbering follows the labeling of the video inputs on the device.

Enable

To enable simultaneous data reception on several receivers you need to activate the multicast function. To do this, select the check box. Then enter the multicast address.

Multicast Address

Enter a valid multicast address for each stream from the relevant encoder (video input) to be operated in multicast mode (duplication of the data streams in the network).

With the setting 0.0.0.0 the encoder for the relevant stream operates in multi-unicast mode

(copying of data streams in the device). The device supports multi-unicast connections for up to five simultaneously connected receivers.

Note: Duplication of data places a heavy demand on the device and can lead to impairment of the image quality under certain circumstances.

Port

Assign a different port to each data stream if there are simultaneous data streams at the same multicast address.

Enter the port address of the required stream here.

Streaming

Select the check box to activate multicast streaming mode for the relevant stream. The device even streams multicast data if no connection is active.

For normal multicast operation, streaming is typically not required.

Packet TTL (only for Dinion IP, Gen4 and FlexiDome)

Enter a value to specify how long the multicast data packets are active on the network. If

multicast is to be run via a router, the value must be greater than 1.

Network > FTP Posting page 17.25

17.25.1

JPEG posting

This function allows you to save individual JPEG images on an FTP server at specific intervals.

Then, retrieve these images at a later date to reconstruct alarm events, if required.

Image size

Select the resolution for the JPEG images.

File name

Select how file names are created for the individual images that are transmitted.

– Overwrite

The same file name is always used. An existing file is overwritten by the current file.

– Increment

A number from 000 to 255 is added to the file name and automatically incremented by 1.

When the number reaches 255, the number starts again from 000.

– Date/time suffix

The date and time are automatically added to the file name. Ensure that the date and time of the device are always set correctly. For example, the file snap011008_114530.jpg

was stored on October 1, 2008 at 11.45 and 30 seconds.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

148 en | Encoders / Decoders page

17.25.2

17.26

17.27

17.27.1

Bosch Video Management System

Posting interval (s; 0 = Off)

Enter the interval in seconds at which the images is sent to an FTP server. Enter zero for no images to be sent.

FTP server

FTP server IP address

Type the IP address of the FTP server on which to save the JPEG images.

FTP server login

Type your login name for the FTP server.

FTP server password

Type the password for the FTP server.

Path on FTP server

Type the exact path where to save the images on the FTP server.

Post JPEG from camera

Select the check box to activate the camera input for the JPEG image. The numbering follows the labeling of the video inputs on the device.

Max. bit rate

You can limit the bit rate for FTP posting.

Service > Licenses page

This page allows you to enable additional functions or software modules.

Installation code

Displays the installation code.

Activation key

Type the activation key. The activation key cannot be deactivated and is not transferable to other units. The activation key cannot be deactivated again and is not transferable to other units.

Installed licenses

Displays the installed licenses after their activation.

Decoder > Decoder page

Decoder profile

Allows you to set the various options for the display of video images on an analog monitor or

VGA monitor.

Monitor name

Type the name of the monitor. The monitor name facilitates the identification of the remote monitor location. Use a name that makes it as easy as possible to identify the location.

Click to update the name in the Device Tree.

Standard

Select the video output signal of the monitor you are using. Eight pre-configured settings for the VGA monitors are available in addition to the PAL and NTSC options for analog video monitors.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

17.27.2

Encoders / Decoders page | en 149

Caution!

Selecting a VGA setting with values outside the technical specification of the monitor can result in severe damage to the monitor. Refer to the technical documentation of the monitor you are using.

Window layout

Select the default image layout for the monitor.

VGA screen size

Type the aspect ratio of the screen (for example 4 x 3) or the physical size of the screen in millimeters. The device uses this information to accurately scale the video image for distortion-free display.

Monitor display

The device recognizes transmission interruptions and displays a warning on the monitor.

Display transmission disturbance

Select On to display a warning in case of transmission interruption.

Disturbance sensitivity

Move the slider to adjust the level of the interruption that triggers the warning.

Disturbance notification text

Type the text of the warning the monitor displays when connection is lost. The maximum text length is 31 characters.

Delete decoder logo

Click to delete the logo that has been configured on the Web page of the decoder.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

150 en | Maps and Structure page

18 Maps and Structure page

The count of items below an entry is displayed in square brackets.

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Maps and Structure

Permissions can get lost. If you move a group of devices, these devices loose their permission settings. You must set the permissions on the User Groups page again.

Displays the Device Tree, the Logical Tree, and the map window.

Allows you to introduce a structure for all the devices in your Bosch Video Management

System. Your structure is displayed in the Logical Tree.

Allows you to perform the following tasks:

– Configuring the Full Logical Tree

– Managing resource files, assigning them to nodes

Creating hot spots on a map

Resource files can be:

– Site map files

– Document files

– Web files

– Audio files

Command Scripts

– Camera sequence files

Hot spots can be:

– Cameras

– Inputs

– Relays

– Command Scripts

– Sequences

– Links to other maps

Displays a dialog box for managing resource files.

Displays a dialog box for adding a Command Script to the Logical Tree.

Displays a dialog box for adding a camera sequence file.

Displays a dialog box for adding a node.

Displays a dialog box for adding map resource files.

Displays a dialog box for adding an HTML file.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

18.1

Resource Manager dialog box

Main window > or

Maps and Structure >

Maps and Structure page | en 151

18.2

Main window > Maps and Structure > > Manage...

Allows you to manage resource files.

You can manage the following file formats:

DWF files (map resource files)

For use in Operator Client, these files are converted to a bitmap format.

– HTML files (HTML documents, e.g. action plans)

– MP3 (audio file)

– TXT files (text files)

– URL files (contain links to Web pages)

MHT files (Web archives)

– WAV (audio file)

Click to display a dialog box for importing a resource file.

Click to display the Add URL dialog box.

Click to remove the selected resource file.

Click to rename the selected resource file.

Click to display a dialog box for replacing the selected resource file with another one.

Click to display a dialog box for exporting the selected resource file.

Select Resource dialog box

Main window > Maps and Structure >

Allows you to add a map file in DWF format to the Logical Tree.

Select a resource file:

Click a filename to select a map file. The content of the selected file is displayed in the preview pane.

Manage...

Click to display the Resource Manager dialog box.

Sequence Builder dialog box 18.3

Main window > Maps and Structure >

Allows you to manage camera sequences.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

152 en | Maps and Structure page Bosch Video Management System

18.4

Click to display the Add Sequence dialog box.

Click to rename a camera sequence.

Click to remove the selected camera sequence.

Add Step

Click to display the Add Sequence Step dialog box.

Remove Step

Click to remove selected steps.

Step

Displays the number of the step. All cameras of a particular step have the same dwell time.

Dwell

Allows you to change the dwell time (seconds).

Camera Number

Click a cell to select a camera via its logical number.

Camera

Click a cell to select a camera via its name.

Camera Function

Click a cell to change the function of the camera in this row.

Data

Type the time for the duration of the selected camera function. To configure this, you must have selected an entry in the Camera column and an entry in the Camera Function column.

Data Unit

Select the unit for the selected time, for example seconds. To configure this, you must have selected an entry in the Camera column and an entry in the Camera Function column.

Add to Logical Tree

Click to add the selected camera sequence to the Logical Tree and to close the dialog box.

Add Sequence dialog box

Main window > Maps and Structure > > Sequence Builder dialog box >

Allows you to configure the properties of a camera sequence.

Sequence name:

Type an appropriate name for the new camera sequence.

Logical number:

For using with a CCTV keyboard, enter a logical number for the sequence.

Dwell time:

Enter the appropriate dwell time.

Cameras per step:

Enter the number of cameras in each step.

Steps:

Enter the appropriate number of steps.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

18.5

Add Sequence Step dialog box

18.6

18.7

Maps and Structure page | en 153

Main window > Maps and Structure > > Add Step button

Allows you to add a step with a new dwell time to an existing camera sequence.

Dwell time:

Enter the appropriate dwell time.

Add URL dialog box

Main window > Maps and Structure > >

Allows you to add an Internet address (URL) to your system. You can add this Internet address

to the Logical Tree as a document. The user can display an Internet page in his Operator Client.

Name:

Type a display name for the URL.

URL:

Type the URL.

Select Map for Link dialog box

Main window > Maps and Structure > Select a map folder

On the map, right-click and click Create Link

Allows you to select a map for creating a link to another map.

Click another map to select.

Select

Click to insert the link to the selected map.

in the Logical Tree >

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

154 en | Schedules page

19 Schedules page

19.1

Bosch Video Management System

Main window >

Allows you to configure Recording Schedules and Task Schedules.

Click to rename the selected Recording or Task Schedule.

Recording Schedules

Displays the Recording Schedules Tree. Select an entry for configuring.

Task Schedules

Displays the Task Schedules Tree. Select an entry for configuring.

Add

Click to add a new Task Schedule.

Delete

Click to delete the selected Task Schedule.

Recording Schedules page

19.2

Main window > > Select an item in the Recording Schedules tree

Allows you to configure Recording Schedules.

Weekdays

Click to display the Schedule Table for weekdays. The time periods of all configured Recording

Schedules are displayed.

Drag the pointer to select the time periods for the selected schedule. All selected cells get the color of the selected schedule.

The 24 hours of the day are displayed horizontally. Every hour is divided into 4 cells. One cell represents 15 minutes.

Holidays

Click to display the Schedule Table for holidays.

Exception Days

Click to display the Schedule Table for exception days.

Add

Click to display a dialog box for adding the required holidays or exception days.

Delete

Click to display a dialog box for removing holidays or exception days.

Task Schedules page

Main window > > Select an item in the Task Schedules tree

Allows you to configure the available Task Schedules. You can configure a standard or a

recurring pattern.

Standard

Click to display the Schedule Table for configuring standard Task Schedules. If you configure a

Standard Pattern, no Recurring Pattern is valid for the selected schedule.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Schedules page | en 155

Recurring

Click to display the Schedule Table for configuring a recurring pattern for the selected Task

Schedule. For example, you configure a schedule for every second Tuesday of every month or for the 4th of July of every year. If you configure a recurring pattern, no standard pattern is valid for the selected Task Schedule.

Weekdays

Click to display the Schedule Table for weekdays.

Drag the pointer to select the time periods for the selected schedule. The selected cells are displayed in the color of the selected schedule.

The 24 hours of the day are displayed horizontally. Every hour is divided into 4 cells. One cell represents 15 minutes.

Holidays

Click to display the Schedule Table for holidays.

Exception Days

Click to display the Schedule Table for exception days.

Clear All

Click to clear the time periods of all available days (weekdays, holidays, exception days).

Select All

Click to select the time periods of all available days (weekdays, holidays, exception days).

Add...

Click to display a dialog box for adding the required holidays or exception days.

Delete...

Click to display a dialog box for deleting holidays or exception days.

Recurrence Pattern

Click the frequency with which you want the Task Schedule to recur (Daily, Weekly, Monthly,

Yearly) and then select the corresponding options.

Day Pattern

Drag the pointer to select the time period(s) for the recurring pattern.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

156 en | Cameras and Recording page

20 Cameras and Recording page

20.1

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Cameras and Recording

Displays the Camera Table page or a Recording Table page.

Allows you to configure camera properties and recording settings.

Allows you to filter the cameras that are displayed according to their type.

Click to copy recording settings from one Recording Schedule to another.

Click to display the Stream Quality Settings dialog box.

Click to display the Scheduled Recording Settings dialog box.

Click to display the dialog box for configuring a selected PTZ camera.

Displays all available cameras regardless of their storage device.

Click to filter the displayed cameras according to their storage device.

Displays the corresponding Camera Table. No recording settings are available because these cameras are not recorded in Bosch Video Management System.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

Cameras page

Main window > Cameras and Recording > Click a recording device, for example

Displays various information on the cameras available in your Bosch Video Management

System.

Allows you to change the following camera properties:

– Camera name

– Assignment of an audio source

– Logical number

PTZ control, if available

– Live quality (VRM and Live / Local Storage)

– Recording settings profile

– Minimum and maximum storage time

4 Click a column title to sort the table by this column.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Cameras and Recording page | en 157

Encoder

Displays the device type.

Device Family

Displays the type of firmware used in the encoder.

Camera

Displays the name of the camera.

Network Address

Displays the IP address of the camera.

Location

Displays the location of the camera. If the camera is not assigned to a location yet,

Unassigned Location is displayed.

Number

Click a cell to edit the logical number that the camera received automatically when it was detected. If you enter an already used number, a corresponding error message is displayed.

The logical number is "free" again when the camera is removed.

Audio

Click a cell to assign an audio source to the camera.

If an alarm occurs with low priority and with a camera that has audio configured, this audio

signal is played even when an alarm with higher priority is currently being displayed. But this is only true, if the high priority alarm has no audio configured.

Stream 1 - Codec / Stream 2 - Codec (only VRM and Local Storage)

Click a cell to select the desired codec for encoding the stream.

The following entries are available:

– MPEG-4 SH++ (only for encoders that do not support H.264)

Classic codec for MPEG-4 encoding.

– H.264 BP+ (only for VIPX and ARM)

Codec for H.264 encoding with the Baseline+ Profile optimized for low bit rates. Use for

live viewing with VIPX.

Note: If live video is to be displayed on a VIPX Decoder, select H.264 BP+.

– H.264 MP (only for VIPX)

Codec for H.264 encoding with the Main Profile optimized for efficient encoding. Use for recording.

– H.264 MP Low Latency (only for ARM)

Codec for H.264 encoding with the Main Profile optimized for low bit rates and efficient encoding. Use for live viewing and recording.

For ARM: Use H.264 MP Low Latency for both live viewing and for recording.

Stream 1 - Quality / Stream 2 - Quality

Select the desired quality of the stream used for live or recording. You configure quality settings in the Stream Quality Settings dialog box.

Live Video (only VRM and Live Only / Local Storage)

Click a cell to select the stream for a VRM or a local storage / live only encoder.

Recording (only VRM and Local Storage)

Click a cell to select the required recording setting. You configure the available recording settings in the Scheduled Recording Settings dialog box.

(Only visible when you click All)

Select a check box to activate PTZ control.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

158 en | Cameras and Recording page

20.2

Bosch Video Management System

Note:

For port settings refer to COM1, 143.

Port (Only visible when you click All)

Click a cell to specify which encoder serial port is used for PTZ control. For a PTZ camera connected to a Bosch Allegiant system, you can select Allegiant. For such a camera you do not need to use a trunk line.

Protocol (Only visible when you click All)

Click a cell to select the appropriate protocol for the PTZ control.

PTZ Address (Only visible when you click

Type the address number for the PTZ control.

All)

Storage Min Time [days] (only VRM and Local Storage)

Click a cell to edit the minimum number of days that video data from this camera is retained.

Recordings younger than this number of days are not deleted automatically.

Storage Max Time [days] (only VRM and Local Storage)

Click a cell to edit the maximum number of days that video data from this camera is retained.

Only recordings older than this number of days are deleted automatically.

Scheduled Recording Settings dialog box (only VRM and Local

Storage)

Main window > Cameras and Recording >

Allows you to configure schedule-dependent recording settings for each available device family.

A device family is available when at least one encoder of this device family has been added to

the Device Tree. In the Cameras table, you assign such a recording setting to each camera.

You use the Recording Schedules configured on the Schedules page.

Note: Switching on or off the normal recording is valid for all device families.

Available Recording Settings

Select a pre-defined recording setting to change its properties. You can add or delete a userdefined setting.

Name:

Type in a name for the new recording setting.

Select the desired device family to configure the recording settings valid for this device family.

For the selected device family, select a Recording Schedule to configure the recording settings.

Recording:

Switch on or off the normal recording (continuous and prealarm).

Recording Mode

Select the desired recording mode.

The following items are available:

– Continuous

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

20.3

Cameras and Recording page | en 159

– Prealarm

Stream:

Select the desired stream used for normal recording.

Note: It depends on the device family which streams are available.

Quality:

Select the desired stream quality used for normal recording. The available quality settings are configured in the Stream Quality Settings dialog box.

Duration

Enter the desired recording time before an alarm. You enter the time in the format hh.mm.ss.

Note: Only enabled when Prealarm is selected.

Alarm Recording:

Allows you to switch on or off the alarm recording for this camera.

Motion Alarm:

Allows you to switch on or off alarm recording triggered by motion.

Stream:

Select the stream used for alarm recording.

Note: It depends on the device family which streams are available.

Quality:

Select the desired stream quality used for alarm recording. The available quality settings are configured in the Stream Quality Settings dialog box.

Only for ARM: When you select the No modification entry, alarm recording uses the same quality as used for continuous/prealarm recording. We recommend using the No modification entry. When you select a stream quality for alarm recording, only the values for image encoding interval and target bit rate are modified according to the settings in this stream quality. The other quality settings are used that are configured in the quality setting assigned to the continuous/prealarm recording.

Duration

Enter the desired alarm recording time. You enter the time in the format hh.mm.ss.

Recording settings pages (NVR only)

Main window > Cameras and Recording > > Click a Recording Schedule tab

(for example )

Allows you to configure the recording settings for all encoders assigned to your system’s NVR.

The displayed Recording Schedules are configured in Schedules.

Only those columns are described that are not part of a Camera Table.

4 Click a column title to sort the table by this column.

Continuous Recording

In the Quality column, click a cell to disable recording or to select the stream quality of stream 1.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

160 en | Cameras and Recording page

20.4

Bosch Video Management System

Live/Pre-event Recording

In the Quality column, click a cell to select the stream quality of the live view (required for

instant playback) and the pre-event recording (required for motion and alarm recording) mode

of stream 2. If dual streaming is active on this encoder, you can select stream 1 to use for live

or pre-event recording.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

Motion Recording

In the Quality column, click a cell to disable recording or to select the stream quality of stream 1.

In the column, click a cell to activate audio.

In the Pre-event [s] column, click a cell to select the recording time before the motion event in seconds.

In the Post-event [s] column, click a cell to select the recording time after the motion event in seconds.

Alarm Recording

In the Quality column, click a cell to select the stream quality of stream 1.

To enable alarm recording, configure a corresponding alarm.

In the column, select a check box to activate audio.

In the Pre-event [s] column, click a cell to select the time before the alarm in seconds.

In the Post-event [s] column, click a cell to select the time after the alarm in seconds.

Stream Quality Settings dialog box

Main window > Cameras and Recording >

Allows you to configure stream quality profiles that you can later assign to the recording modes.

A stream quality combines video resolution, frame rate, maximum bandwidth, and video

compression.

Click to add a new stream quality.

Click to delete a selected stream quality. You cannot delete the default recording settings.

Name:

Displays the name of the stream quality. When you add a new stream quality, you can change the name.

SD video resolution:

Select the desired video resolution. For an HD quality you configure the SD quality of stream

2.

Image encoding interval:

Move the slider or type the appropriate value.

The system calculates the corresponding values for IPS (PAL and NTSC).

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Cameras and Recording page | en 161

With the image encoding interval you configure the interval at which images are encoded and transmitted. If 1 is entered, all images are encoded. Entering 4 means that only every fourth image is encoded, the following three images are skipped - this can be particularly advantageous with low bandwidths. The lower the bandwidth the higher this value should be to achieve best-quality video.

Target bit rate [Kbps]:

Move the slider or type the appropriate value.

You can limit the data rate for the encoder to optimize usage of bandwidth in your network.

The target data rate should be set according to the desired picture quality for typical scenes with no excessive motion.

For complex images or frequent changes of image content due to frequent movements, this limit can be temporarily exceeded up to the value you enter in the Maximum bit rate [Kbps]: field.

Maximum bit rate [Kbps]:

Move the slider or type the appropriate value.

With the maximum bit rate you configure the maximum transmission speed which cannot be exceeded.

You set a bit rate limit to be able to reliably determine the appropriate disk space for storage of the video data.

Depending on the video quality settings for the I- and P-Frames, this fact can result in individual images being skipped.

The value entered here must be at least 10% higher than the value entered in the Target bit

rate [Kbps]: field. If the value entered here is too low, it will automatically be adjusted.

I-Frame Distance

This parameter allows you to set the intervals in which the I-Frames are coded. Click

Automatic, to insert I-Frames as necessary. An entry of 1 indicates that I-Frames are continuously generated. An entry of 2 indicates that only every second image is an I-Frame, and 3 only every third image etc. The I-Frames in between are coded as P-Frames.

Frame Quality Level

Here you can set a value between 0 and 100 for both the I-Frames and the P-Frames. The lowest value results in the highest quality and the lowest frame refresh rate. The highest value results in the highest frame refresh rate and the lowest image quality.

The lower the available transmission bandwidth, the higher adjust the quality level to maintain high quality of the video.

Note:

You adjust the video quality dependent on the motion and level of detail in the video. If you check the Automatic check boxes, the optimum relationship between motion and image definition is automatically adjusted.

VIP X1600 XFM4 Settings

Allows you to configure the following H.264 settings for the VIP X 1600 XFM4 encoder module.

H.264 deblocking filter: Select to improve visual quality and prediction performance by smoothing the sharp edges.

CABAC: Select to activate high efficient compression. Uses a large amount of processing power.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

162 en | Cameras and Recording page

20.5

PTZ Settings dialog box

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Cameras and Recording >

Allows you to configure a PTZ camera.

> Select a PTZ camera >

Note:

First configure the port settings of your PTZ camera before you can configure the PTZ camera settings. Otherwise the PTZ control is not working in this dialog box.

You set predefined positions and auxiliary commands.

Click to move the camera to the predefined position or to execute the command.

Click to save the predefined position or command.

Click to rename the predefined position or command.

Click to remove the predefined position or command.

Predefined Positions tab

Click to display the table with the predefined positions.

Nr

Displays the number of the predefined position.

Name

Click a cell to edit the name of the predefined position.

Aux Commands tab

Click to display the table with the auxiliary commands.

Nr

Displays the number of the auxiliary command.

Name

Click a cell to edit the name of the command.

Code

Click a cell to edit the command´s code.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

21 Events page

Events page | en 163

Main window > Events

Displays the Event Tree with all available events and an Event Configuration Table for each

event. The events are grouped by their type, for example, all camera recording events like continuous recording or alarm recording are grouped under Recording Mode.

The available events are grouped beyond their corresponding devices. A state change of a device is displayed beyond as . All other events are displayed under device dependant groups as .

You can configure for each event:

– Trigger an alarm according to a schedule (not available for all events)

– Log the event according to a schedule. An event is displayed in the Event List of the

Operator Client if it is logged.

Execute a Command Script according to a schedule (not available for all events)

If the event occurs, your settings are executed.

You can create a Compound Event which combines several events with Boolean expressions.

4 Click a tree item to display the corresponding Event Configuration Table.

Click to duplicate an event. Use it to generate multiple alarms for a certain event.

Click to delete a duplicated or a Compound Event.

Click to rename the selected Compound Event.

Click to display a dialog box for creating Compound Events using Boolean expressions of other events (maximum 10).

Compound Events are added to the Event Configuration Table.

Click to edit the selected Compound Event.

Click to display a dialog box for creating and editing Command Scripts.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

Debounce Settings tab

Note: For some events the Debounce Settings tab is not available due to technical limitations.

Allows you to configure debounce settings for the selected event.

Debounce Time:

During the entered time period all further events are ignored.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

164 en | Events page

21.1

Bosch Video Management System

Event State Priority:

For an event state you can assign a priority setting.

Edit Priorities

Click to display a dialog box for configuring a priority setting.

Add Setting

Click to add a row for configuring a debounce setting that is deviating from the debounce settings for all devices.

Remove Setting

Click to remove a selected row. To select a row click the left row header.

Settings tab

Device

Displays the name of the device or schedule.

Network

Displays the IP address of the corresponding IP device.

Trigger Alarm

Click a cell to select a Recording or Task Schedule for triggering an alarm.

Select Always if you want the alarm to be triggered independently from the point in time.

Select Never if you do not want the alarm to be triggered.

Log

In the Schedule column, click a cell to select a Recording or Task Schedule for logging.

Select Always if you want the event to be logged independently from the point in time.

Select Never if you do not want the event to be logged.

Script

In the Script column, click a cell to select a Command Script.

In the Schedule column, click a cell to select a Recording or Task Schedule for executing a

Command Script.

Select Always if you want the Command Script to be executed independently from the point in time.

Select Never if you do not want the Command Script to be executed.

Command Script Editor dialog box

Main window > Events >

Allows you to create and edit Command Scripts.

Click to save the changed settings.

Click to restore the saved settings.

Click to check the code of a script.

Click to create a scriptlet file.

Click to delete a scriptlet file.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Events page | en 165

21.2

21.3

Click to display a dialog box for importing a script file.

Click to display a dialog box for exporting a script file.

Click to convert an existing script to the other available script language. All existing script text is deleted.

Click to display the Online Help for Bosch Video Management System Script API.

Click to display the Online Help for Bosch Video Management System.

Click to close the Command Script Editor dialog box.

Create Compound Event / Edit Compound Event dialog box

Main window > Events >

Allows you to create or modify a Compound Event.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

Event name:

Type the required name for the Compound Event.

Event States:

Select the state change that shall be part of a Compound Event.

Objects:

Select one or more of the available objects of the selected event state. This state and the selected object appear in the Compound Event Tree, as immediate child of the root operator.

Compound Event:

Allows you to build compound events in the Compound Event Tree. All immediate children of a

Boolean operator (AND, OR) are combined by this operator.

Select Script Language dialog box

Main window > Events >

Allows you to set the script language for your Command Scripts.

You cannot change the script language for existing Command Scripts.

Script Language:

Select the required script language.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

166 en | Events page

21.4

Edit Priorities of Event Type dialog box

21.5

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > Events > Debounce Settings tab > Edit Priorities button

Name of Priority:

Type in a name for the priority setting.

State Value

Displays the names of the event states of the select event.

State Priority

Enter the desired priority. 1=highest priority, 10=lowest priority.

Select Devices dialog box

Select

Select the check box for the desired entry and click OK to add a row in the Devices with

Deviating Debounce Settings table.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

22 Alarms page

Alarms page | en 167

Main window > Alarms

Displays the Event Tree and an Alarm Configuration Table for each event. Only the events

configured on the Events page are displayed.

In the tables you configure for each event how an alarm triggered by this event is displayed

and which cameras are recorded and displayed when this alarm occurs.

Some events are configured as alarms per default, e.g., a system error.

For the following events you cannot configure an alarm:

– Change of a recording mode

– Change of an alarm state

Most of the user actions, e.g. PTZ action

Click to display the Resource Manager dialog box.

Displays a dialog box to set alarm settings valid for this Management Server.

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

4 Click a tree item to display the corresponding Alarm Configuration Table.

Device

Displays the device of the event condition selected in the Events Tree.

Network Address

Displays the IP address of the corresponding IP device.

Alarm Identity

In the Priority column, click in a cell to type the alarm priority for the selected alarm (100 is low priority, 1 is high priority). In the Title column, click in a cell to type the title of the alarm to be displayed in Bosch Video Management System, for example in the Alarm List. In the

Color column, click in a cell to display a dialog box for selecting a color for the alarm to be displayed in the Operator Client, for example in the Alarm List.

Alarm Image Panes

In one of the 1-5 columns, click ... in a cell to display a dialog box for selecting a camera.

You can only select a camera that was added to the Logical Tree in Maps and Structure.

You can configure the number of available Alarm Image panes in the Alarm Settings dialog box.

In the Audio File column, click ... in a cell to display a dialog box for selecting an audio file that is played in case of an alarm.

Alarm Options

Click ... in a cell to display the Alarm Options dialog box.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Bosch Video Management System 168 en | Alarms page

22.1

Alarm Settings dialog box

22.2

Main window >

Alarm Settings tab

Alarms >

Max. Image panes per alarm:

Enter the maximum count of Alarm Image panes to be displayed in case of an alarm.

Auto-clear time:

Enter the number of seconds until an alarm is automatically cleared.

This only applies for alarms that are set to Auto-clear in the Alarms page.

Manual alarm recording time:

Only valid for NVR recordings.

Enter the number of minutes for the duration of alarm recording that a user can start manually in the Operator Client.

The user can stop the manual recording before this time is elapsed.

Analog Monitor Groups tab

Show blank screen

Click to configure that on a monitor not being used for alarm display nothing is shown.

Continue live display

Click to configure that on a monitor not being used for alarm display live display is shown.

Select Image Pane Content dialog box

i

Main window > Alarms > or > Alarm Image Panes column > Click ... in one of the 1-5 columns

Allows you to select the Logical tree item that is displayed and recorded (if the item is a

camera) in case of the selected alarm.

Notice!

A map displayed in an Alarm Image pane is optimized for display and contains only the initial view of the basic .dwf file.

Search Item

Enter text to find an item in the Logical Tree.

Find

Click to find the camera with the entered search text in its description.

Live

Click to determine that the live image of the camera is displayed in case of an alarm.

Instant playback

Click to determine that instant playback of the camera is displayed.

The rewind time for instant playback is configured in the Alarm Settings dialog box, see Alarm

Settings dialog box, 168.

Pause playback

Select the check box to display the alarm instant playback camera with paused instant playback. The user can start instant playback if needed.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

22.3

Alarms page | en 169

Record this camera

Select the check box to enable alarm recording for this camera in case of an alarm. If an alarm is triggered, this camera is recorded in alarm recording quality. The duration of the recording is the duration of the alarm state plus pre- and post-alarm time. This setting directly changes the setting for alarm recording in the Alarm Options dialog box and vice versa.

Select Resource dialog box

22.4

Main window > column > Click ...

Alarms > or > Alarm Image Panes column > Audio File

Allows you to select an audio file that is played in case of an alarm.

Play

Click to play the selected audio file.

Pause

Click to pause the selected audio file.

Stop

Click to stop the selected audio file.

Manage...

Click to display the Resource Manager dialog box.

Alarm Options dialog box

Main window > Alarms > or > Alarm Options column > ...

Allows you to configure the following settings for alarms:

Cameras that start recording in case of an alarm

– Enabling protection for these alarm recordings (only for NVR recording)

Triggering PTZ commands in case of alarm

– Notifications that are sent in case of an alarm

– Workflow that has to be processed in case of an alarm

Assigning cameras that are displayed in analog monitor groups in case of an alarm.

Cameras tab

Nr

Displays the camera number as configured on the Cameras and Recording page.

Name

Displays the camera name as configured on the Cameras and Recording page.

Location

Displays the location as configured on the Maps and Structure page.

Record

Select a check box to enable alarm recording for this camera in case of an alarm. If an alarm is triggered, this camera is recorded in alarm recording quality. The duration of the recording is the duration of the alarm state plus pre- and post-alarm time. This setting directly changes the setting for alarm recording in the Select Image Pane Content dialog box and vice versa.

Protect Recording (only for NVR recording)

Select a check box to protect the alarm recording of this camera.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

170 en | Alarms page Bosch Video Management System

Auxiliary Command

Click a cell to select an auxiliary command to be executed in case of an alarm.

Entries in this list are only available for a PTZ camera.

Predefined Position

Click a cell to select a predefined position to be set in case of an alarm.

Entries in this list are only available for a PTZ camera.

Notifications tab

E-mail

Select the check box to send an e-mail in case of an alarm.

Server:

Select an e-mail server.

Recipients:

Type the e-mail addresses of the recipients (example: [email protected]).

SMS

Select the check box to send an SMS in case of an alarm.

Device:

Select an SMS device.

Recipients:

Type the mobile numbers of the recipients.

Text:

Type the text of the notification.

Information:

Select the check box to add the corresponding information to the notification text.

Workflow tab

Record only alarm

Select the check box to specify that the camera is only recorded and not being displayed in case of this alarm. This check box is only active if the Record check box on the Cameras tab is selected.

Auto-clear alarm after configured time ('Global Alarm Options' dialog box)

Select the check box to specify that this alarm is automatically cleared.

Auto-clear alarm when event state changes back to normal

Select the check box to specify that this alarm is automatically cleared when the event that triggers this alarm changes its state. The alarm will not be cleared automatically if it is accepted and unaccepted.

Show action plan

Select the check box to enable the workflow that must be processed in case of an alarm.

Resources...

Click to display the Resource Manager dialog box. Select a document with a description of the corresponding workflow.

Display a comment box

Select the check box to enable displaying a comment box in case of an alarm. In this comment box the user can type comments on the alarm.

Force the operator to process the workflow

Select the check box to force the user to process the workflow. If selected, the user cannot clear the alarm until he has entered a comment on the alarm.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Alarms page | en 171

Execute the following Client Script when alarm is accepted:

Select a Client Command Script that is executed automatically, when the user accepts an

alarm.

Analog Monitor Group tab

1...10

In a numbered column, click a cell and select a camera from the Logical Tree. This camera will be displayed in the assigned monitor in case of an alarm.

Clear table

Click to remove all camera assignments to analog monitor groups.

Alarm title

Select the check box to configure that the title of the alarm is displayed on the analog monitors as an on-screen display.

Alarm time

Select the check box to configure that the time of the alarm is displayed on the analog monitors as an on-screen display.

Alarm date

Select the check box to configure that the date of the alarm is displayed on the analog monitors as an on-screen display.

Alarm camera name

Select the check box to configure that the name of the alarm camera is displayed on the analog monitors as an on-screen display.

Alarm camera number

Select the check box to configure that the number of the alarm camera is displayed on the analog monitors as an on-screen display.

Only on 1st monitor

Select the check box to configure that the title and the time of the alarm is displayed only on the first monitor of the analog monitor group as an on-screen display.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

172 en | User Groups page

23 User Groups page

Bosch Video Management System

Main window > User Groups

The following user group is available by default:

– Admin Group (user name: Admin)

Allows you to configure user groups, Enterprise User Groups and Enterprise Access.

User Groups tab

Click to display the pages available for configuring the rights of the standard user group.

Enterprise User Groups tab (only available with valid Enterprise license)

Click to display the pages available for configuring the permissions of an Enterprise User

Group.

Enterprise Access tab (only available with valid Enterprise license)

Click to display the pages available for adding and configuring Enterprise Access.

Click to delete a selected entry.

Click to add a new group or account.

Click to add a new user to the selected user group. Change the default user name if desired.

Click to add a new dual authorization group.

Click to add a new logon pair for dual authorization.

Displays a dialog box for copying permissions from a selected user group to another user group.

Click to display the pages available for configuring the permissions of this group.

Click to display the page available for configuring the properties of this user.

Click to display the page available for configuring the properties of this logon pair.

Click to display the pages available for configuring the permissions of this dual authorization group.

Permissions on an Enterprise System

For an Enterprise System you configure the following groups of permissions:

– Operating permissions of Operator Client that the user needs for working with the devices of all configured Management Server computers, for example the user interface of the alarm monitor.

Use an Enterprise User Group. Configure it on the Enterprise Management Server.

– Device permissions valid on each Management Server.

Use Enterprise Access. Configure it on each Management Server.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

23.1

User Groups page | en 173

Permissions on a single Management Server

For managing the access to only one Management Server, use the standard user group. You configure all permissions on this Management Server in this user group.

You can configure dual authorization user groups for standard user groups and for Enterprise

User Groups. Dual authorization is not available for Enterprise Access.

Name of the user group type

User group

Enterprise User

Group

Enterprise Access

Dual authorization user group

Enterprise dual authorization

Does it contain users?

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Available configuration settings

Where do you configure?

– Operating and device permissions

– Management

Server

– Operating permissions

– Per Management

Server in the server list: Name of the corresponding

Enterprise Account with logon credentials

Enterprise

Management

Server

– Device permissions

– Logon credentials

– Management Server permissions

Management

Server

Management

Server

– Per Management

Server: Name of the corresponding

Enterprise User Group with logon credentials

– Enterprise

Management

Server

Table 23.1: Types of user groups

Type in a string and press the ENTER key to filter the displayed items. Only items containing the string and their corresponding parent items (only in trees) are displayed. The count of filtered items and the total count of items is provided. An active filter is indicated by . Enclose strings with double quotes to find them exactly, for example "Camera 1" exactly filters the cameras with this name, not camera 201.

To cancel filtering, delete the string in the filter field.

Add New User Group/Account dialog box

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab >

Main window > or

User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab

Allows you to create a standard user group, an Enterprise User Group or an Enterprise Account.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

174 en | User Groups page Bosch Video Management System

The Enterprise User Groups tab is only available if the appropriate license is available and if

23.2

one or more Management Server computers are configured in

System > Server List.

Devices > Enterprise

The Enterprise Access tab is only available, if the appropriate license is available and if devices are configured on the respective Management Server.

Name:

Type in a name for the group or account.

Description:

Type in a description for the group or account.

For Enterprise Accounts:

Enterprise Account Password:

Type in a password.

Confirm password:

Enter the new password again.

See also

Creating a group or account, 70

User Group Properties page

Main window >

Group Properties tab or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions > User

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

> User Group Properties tab

Allows you to configure the following settings for the selected user group:

– Logon schedule

– Association of an LDAP user group

Description:

Type an informative description for the user group.

Language:

Select the language of the Operator Client (both NVR and VRM).

Logon schedule:

Select a task or recording schedule. The users of the selected group can only log on to the system in the times defined by this schedule.

Associated LDAP group:

Type the name of the LDAP user group that you want to use for your system.

You can also double-click an item in the LDAP Groups: list.

LDAP Groups:

Displays the available LDAP user groups. You configure LDAP groups in the LDAP Server

Settings dialog box.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

23.3

User Groups page | en 175

Search for Groups

Click to display the available LDAP user groups in the LDAP Groups: list. To find user groups you must make the appropriate settings in the LDAP Server Settings dialog box.

Settings

Click to display the LDAP Server Settings dialog box.

Associate Group

Click to associate the selected LDAP group with this user group.

Clear Group

Click to clear the Associated LDAP group: field. The association of the LDAP group to the

Bosch Video Management System user group is removed.

User Properties page

Main window >

User Properties tab or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions > >

23.4

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

> > User Properties tab

Allows you to configure a new user in a standard user group or in an Enterprise User Group.

Full name:

Type the full name of the user.

Description:

Type an informative description for the user.

Enter new password:

Type the password for the new user.

Confirm password:

Type the new password again.

Apply

Click to apply the settings.

Add New Dual Authorization Group dialog box

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab >

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab >

Allows to create a dual authorization for a standard user group or for an Enterprise User Group.

For Enterprise Access, a dual authorization is not available.

Name:

Type in a name for the group.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

176 en | User Groups page

23.5

Description:

Type in description for the group.

See also

Creating a dual authorization group, 71

Logon Pair Properties page

Main window >

Group > or

Bosch Video Management System

User Groups > User Groups tab > New Dual Authorization

23.6

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > New Enterprise

Dual Authorization Group >

Allows you to modify a pair of user groups to a dual authorization group. The users of the first

user group are the users that must log on in the first dialog box for logging on, the users of the second user group confirm the logon.

Select Logon Pair

In each list, select a user group.

Force dual authorization

Select the check box to force each user to log on only together with a user of the second user group.

Select User Groups dialog box

Main window >

Group > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > New Dual Authorization

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > New Enterprise

Dual Authorization Group >

Allows you to add a pair of user groups to a dual authorization group. The users of the first user

group are the users that must log on in the first dialog box for logging on, the users of the second user group confirm the logon.

Select Logon Pair

In each list, select a user group.

Force dual authorization

Select the check box to force each user to log on only together with a user of the second user group.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

23.7

Camera Permissions page

Main window >

Permissions tab or

User Groups page | en 177

User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions > Camera

Main window >

Camera Permissions tab

User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions >

Allows you to configure the access rights for the features of a selected camera or camera

group for the selected user group.

If new components are added, camera permissions must be configured afterwards.

You can recall the access to a camera on the Logical Tree page.

Camera

Displays the camera name as configured on the Cameras and Recording page.

Location

Displays the location of the camera as configured on the Maps and Structure page.

Access

Select a check box to allow access to this camera.

Live Video

Select a check box to allow using live video.

Live Audio

Select a check box to allow using live audio.

Manual Recording

Select a check box to allow manual recording (alarm recording).

You can select or clear this check box only when the manual alarm recording is enabled on the

Operator Features page.

Playback Video

Select a check box to allow using playback video.

You can select or clear this check box only when playback is enabled on the Operator

Features page.

Playback Audio

Select a check box to allow using playback audio.

You can select or clear this check box only when playback is enabled on the Operator

Features page.

Metadata

Select a check box to allow displaying metadata.

You can select or clear this check box only when the display of metadata is enabled on the

Operator Features page.

Export

Select a check box to allow exporting video data.

You can select or clear this check box only when the export of video data is enabled on the

Operator Features page.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

178 en | User Groups page

23.8

Bosch Video Management System

PTZ

Select a check box to allow using the control of this camera.

You can select or clear this check box only when the PTZ control of a camera is enabled on the

Operator Features page.

Aux

Select a check box to allow executing auxiliary commands.

You can select or clear this check box only when the PTZ control of a camera is enabled on the

Operator Features page.

Set Presets

Select a check box to allow the user to set prepositions of this PTZ camera.

You can select or clear this check box only when the PTZ control of a camera is enabled on the

Operator Features page.

Reference Image

Select a check box to allow updating the reference image of this camera.

Control Priorities

Main window >

Priorities tab or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions > Control

23.9

Main window >

Control Priorities tab

User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions >

Control Priorities

Move the appropriate slider to the right to decrease the priority for acquiring PTZ controls and

Bosch Allegiant trunk lines. A user with a high priority can lock the PTZ controls or the control of a trunk line for users with lower priorities. You set the timeout for locking PTZ control on the Timeout in min. field. The default setting is 1 minute.

Timeout in min.

Enter the time period in minutes.

See also

Configuring various priorities, 76

Copy User Group Permissions dialog box

Main window > or

User Groups > User Groups tab > >

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > >

Allows you to select user group permissions to be copied to selected user groups.

Copy from:

Displays the selected user group. Its permissions are to be copied to another user group.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

23.10

User Groups page | en 179

Settings to Copy

Select a check box to select the desired user group permissions for copying.

Copy to:

Select a check box to specify the user group where to copy the selected user group permissions to.

Decoder Permissions page

Main window > User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions > Decoder Permissions tab or

23.11

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions >

Decoder Permissions tab

Allows you to configure the decoders that the users of this group have access to.

Decoder

Displays the available decoders.

Click the check box to give the user group access to this decoder.

Events and Alarms page

Main window > User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions > Events and Alarms tab or

23.12

Main window >

and Alarms tab

User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions > Events

Allows to configure the permissions for the Events Tree, i.e. you set the events the user group

is authorized or not authorized to use.

For each event there is at least one device. For example, for the Video Loss event the available cameras are the devices. For an event like Backup Finished the corresponding device is Time

Controlled Backup. Hence, a device can be a software process.

1.

Expand a tree item and click the required check boxes for enabling the events. In the

Camera column, select the check box to enable the events of all the available devices.

This ensures that the user group gets events from devices that this user group has no access to. The access to the devices is configured on the Logical Tree page and on the

Camera Permissions page.

2.

To enable or disable all events at once, select or clear the Events and Alarms check box.

LDAP Server Settings dialog box

Main window > User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions > User Group

Properties tab > Settings button or

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Device Permissions >

User Group Properties tab > Settings button

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

180 en | User Groups page Bosch Video Management System

You enter the LDAP server settings that are configured outside of Bosch Video Management

System. You will need the assistance of your IT administrator who set up the LDAP server for the following entries.

All fields are mandatory except the fields in the Test User / User Group group box.

LDAP Server Settings

LDAP Server:

Type the name of the LDAP server.

Port:

Type the port number of the LDAP server (default unencrypted: 389, encrypted: 636)

Secure connection

Select the check box to activate encrypted data transmission.

LDAP basis for user:

Type the unique name (DN = distinguished name) of the LDAP path in which you can search for a user. Example for a DN of the LDAP basis:CN=Users,DC=Security,DC=MyCompany,DC=com

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

23.13

User Groups page | en 181

Filter for user:

Select a filter used to search for a unique user name. Examples are predefined. Replace

%username% with the actual user name.

LDAP basis for group:

Type the unique name of the LDAP path in which you can search for groups.

Example for a DN of the LDAP basis:CN=Users,DC=Security,DC=MyCompany,DC=com

Filter for group member search:

Select a filter used to search for a group member.

Examples are predefined. Replace %usernameDN% with the actual user name and his DN.

Proxy User

User name (DN):

Type the unique name of the proxy user. This user is required to allow the users of this Bosch

Video Management System user group to access the LDAP server.

Password:

Type the proxy user password.

Test

Click to test whether the proxy user has access to the LDAP server.

Test User / User Group

The entries in this group box are not saved after clicking OK. They only serve for testing.

User name:

Type the name of a test user. Omit the DN.

Password:

Type the test user password.

Test User

Click to test whether the combination of user name and password is correct.

Group (DN):

Type the unique group name with which the user is associated.

Test Group

Click to test the association of the user with the group.

Group search filter:

Do not leave this field empty. If there is no entry, you cannot assign an LDAP group to a Bosch

Video Management System user group.

Select a filter to find a user group.

Examples are predefined.

Credentials page

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions >

Credentials tab

Configure the credentials of an Enterprise Account on a Management Server.

You configure Enterprise Access on each Management Server that is member of your Enterprise

System. The Enterprise Management Server uses this credential to grant access to the devices

of this Management Server for the Operator Client that logs on as a user of an Enterprise User

Group.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

182 en | User Groups page Bosch Video Management System

23.14

Rename the item as desired. This is the name of the Enterprise Account.

Description:

Type in a description for this Enterprise Account.

Enter new password: / Confirm password:

Type in and confirm the password for this Management Server.

See also

Add New User Group/Account dialog box, 173

Logical Tree page

Main window >

Tree tab or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Device Permissions > Logical

23.15

Main window >

Tree tab

User Groups > Enterprise Access tab > Device Permissions > Logical

Allows you to configure the Logical Tree for each user group.

Logical Tree

Select a check box to give the users of the selected user group access to the corresponding devices.

You can recall the access to a camera on the Camera Permissions page.

Operator Features page

Main window >

Features tab or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions > Operator

Main window >

> Operator Features tab

User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

Allows you to configure various permissions for the selected user group.

PTZ control of dome cameras

Select the check box to allow the control of a camera.

Control Priorities page: In the Control Priorities field, you can set the priority for acquiring the control of a camera.

Allegiant trunk lines

Select the check box to allow accessing Bosch Allegianttrunk lines.

Control Priorities page: In the Control Priorities field, you can set the priority for acquiring

Bosch Allegiant trunk lines.

Print and save video data

Select the check box to allow printing and saving video data.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System User Groups page | en 183

Alarm processing

Select the check box to allow alarm processing.

Interrupt the Windows Screen Saver for incoming alarms

Select the check box to ensure that an incoming alarm is displayed even when the screen saver is active. If the screen saver requires a user name and password for being interrupted, this setting has no effect.

Alarm display

Select the check box to allow alarm display. If you select this option, the Alarm processing is

deactivated simultaneously.

Playback

Select the check box to allow a higher priority for Playback Mode and to allow the other playback features.

If you clear this check box, the Export video files, Protect and unprotect video data, Delete

video, and Access to video data that has been recorded in periods when the user group has

not been allowed to logon permissions and the Live Video permissions for all available cameras on the Operator Features page are cleared and disabled.

Export video files

Select the check box to allow exporting video data.

If you clear this check box, the permissions for all available cameras on the Operator Features page are disabled also.

Protect and unprotect video data

Select the check box to allow protecting video data.

Delete video

Select the check box to allow deleting video data.

Access to video data that has been recorded in periods when the user group has not been allowed to logon

Select the check box to allow accessing the described video data.

Logbook access

Select the check box to allow accessing the Logbook.

Operator event buttons

Select the check box to allow user event buttons in the Operator Client.

Close Operator Client

Select the check box to allow closing the Operator Client.

Minimize Operator Client

Select the check box to allow minimizing the Operator Client.

Audio Intercom

Select the check box to allow the user to speak on the loudspeakers of an encoder with audioin and audio-out function.

Manual Alarm Recording

Select the check box to allow manual alarm recording.

If you clear this check box, the Metadata permissions for all available cameras on the

Operator Features page are cleared and disabled.

Access VRM Monitor

Select the check box to allow access to the VRM Monitor software.

Set reference image

Select the check box to allow updating the reference image in the Operator Client.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

184 en | User Groups page

23.16

Bosch Video Management System

Set area selection for reference image

Select the check box to allow selecting the area in the camera image for updating the reference image in the Operator Client.

Display order in case of same alarm priority:

Select the appropriate value to configure the order of Alarm Image panes in the Alarm Display of the Operator Client.

Instant playback rewind time:

Enter the number of seconds for the duration of instant playback.

Repeat alarm audio:

Select the check box and enter the number of seconds after an alarm sound is repeated.

Limit access to recorded video to the last n minutes.

Select the check box to limit the access to recorded videos.

In the list, enter the number of minutes.

See also

Configuring operating permissions, 73

Priorities page

Main window >

Priorities tab or

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions >

Main window >

> Priorities tab

User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

23.17

Main window > User Groups >

Allows you to configure the timeout for explicit PTZ locking. You can set the priorities for PTZ control and the display of incoming alarms.

Automatic Popup Behavior

Move the slider to adjust the priority value of Live Image window or Playback Image window.

This value is required for incoming alarms to decide whether this alarm is automatically

displayed in the Alarm Image window.

For example: If you move the slider for Live Image window to 50 and for the Playback Display to 70 and an alarm comes in with a priority of 60, the alarm is only automatically displayed if the user has Playback Display active. The alarm is not automatically displayed when the user has Live Display active.

User Interface page

User Groups > User Groups tab > Operating Permissions > User Main window >

Interface tab or

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System User Groups page | en 185

23.18

Main window > User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab > Operating Permissions

> User Interface tab

Allows you to configure the user interface of 4 monitors used by the Operator Client.

Control Monitor

Select the control monitor which displays Live Mode only.

Alarm Monitor

Select the alarm monitor which can display either Live and Alarm Mode or only Alarm Mode.

Monitor 1 - 4

In the corresponding list, select the required entry.

Image panes aspect ratio

For each monitor select the required aspect ratio for the initial startup of Operator Client. Use

16:9 for HD cameras.

Save settings when shutting down

Select the check box to activate that the system remembers the last state of the user interface when the user logs off from the Operator Client. If the check box is not selected, the Operator

Client starts always with the configured user interface.

Restore Default

Click to restore the default settings of this page.

Load Custom Layout

Click to import an XML file with user interface settings.

Unload Custom Layout

Click to display a dialog box for unloading imported interface settings.

Server Access page

Main window > tab

User Groups > Enterprise User Groups tab >

You configure the server access on an Enterprise Management Server.

> Server Access

You enter the name of the Enterprise Account and its password for each Management Server of

your Enterprise System. This account is configured on each Management Server.

Management Server

Displays the name of the Management Server that you configured on this Enterprise

Management Server.

Network Address

Displays the IP address or DNS name of the Management Server.

Server Number

Displays the number of the Management Server. This number is used by an IntuiKey keyboard to select the desired Management Server.

Access

Click to check when you want to grant access to the Management Server.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

186 en | User Groups page Bosch Video Management System

Enterprise Account

Type in the name of the Enterprise Account that has been configured on the Management

Server.

Enterprise Account Password

Type in the password of the Enterprise Account that has been configured on the Management

Server.

See also

Adding multiple Management Server computers, 81

Creating a group or account, 70

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Concepts | en 187

24

24.1

Concepts

This chapter provides background information on selected issues.

Alarm handling

Alarms can be individually configured to be handled by one or more user groups. When an alarm occurs, it appears in the Alarm List of all users in the user groups configured to receive that alarm. When any one of these users starts to work on the alarm, it disappears from the

Alarm List of all other users.

Alarms are displayed on a workstation’s alarm monitor and optionally on analog monitors. This behavior is described in the following paragraphs.

Alarm flow

1.

An alarm occurs in the system.

2.

Alarm notifications appear in the Alarm Lists of all users configured for this alarm. Alarm video is immediately displayed on configured monitors. If it is an automatically displayed alarm (auto pop-up), the alarm video is also automatically displayed on the Operator

Client workstation’s alarm monitors.

If the alarm is configured as an auto-clear alarm, the alarm is removed from the Alarm List after the auto-clear time (configured in the Configuration Client).

On analog monitors, any quad views from VIP XDs are temporarily replaced by full-screen displays.

3.

One of the users accepts the alarm. The alarm video is then displayed on this user's workstation (if it is not already displayed via auto pop-up). The alarm is removed from all other Alarm Lists and alarm video displays.

4.

The user who accepted the alarm invokes a workflow that can include reading an action plan and entering comments. This step is optional - requirements for workflow can be configured by the administrator.

5.

Finally, the user clears the alarm. This removes the alarm from his Alarm List and alarm display.

On an analog monitor group, the monitors return to the cameras that were displayed before

the alarm occurred.

Alarm Image window

1.

To display alarm video, the Alarm Image window replaces the Live or Playback Image window on the monitor that has been configured for alarm display.

2.

Each alarm gets a row of Image panes. Up to 5 Image panes can be associated with each

alarm. These Image panes can display live video, playback video, or maps.

On an analog monitor group, each alarm can call up cameras on a row of analog monitors.

The number of cameras in the row is limited by the number of columns in the analog monitor group. Monitors in the row that are not used for alarm video can be configured to either continue with their current display or to display a blank screen.

3.

Higher priority alarms are displayed above lower priority alarms on both analog monitor rows and the Operator Client workstation display alarm rows.

4.

If the Alarm Image window is completely full of Alarm Image rows and an additional alarm must be displayed, the lowest priority alarms "stack up" in the bottom row of the Alarm

Image window. You can step through the stacked alarms with the controls at the left side of the alarm row.

You can step through the alarm stacks on analog monitor groups with control buttons in the Monitors window of the Operator Client workstation display. Analog monitors in alarm are indicated by red icons with blinking "LEDs".

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

188 en | Concepts

24.2

24.2.1

Bosch Video Management System

The alarm title, time, and date can be optionally be displayed on all analog monitors, or only the first monitor in the alarm row.

5.

For equal priority alarms, the administrator can configure the order behavior:

– Last-in-First-out (LIFO) mode: in this configuration, new alarms are inserted above older alarms of the same priority.

– First-in-First-out (FIFO) mode; in this configuration, new alarms are inserted below older alarms of the same priority.

6.

An alarm's Image row can appear in the Alarm Image window in one of two ways:

– When it is generated (auto pop-up). This occurs when the alarm priority is higher than display priority.

– When the alarm is accepted. This occurs when the alarm priority is lower than display priority.

Auto pop-up alarms

Alarms can be configured to automatically display (pop up) in the Alarm Image window, based on the alarm priority. Each user group's live and playback displays are also assigned priorities.

When alarms are received with priority higher than that of the user's display, the alarm automatically displays its alarm row in the Alarm Image window. If the Alarm Image window is not currently displayed, it automatically replaces the Live or Playback Image window on the alarm-enabled monitor.

Although auto pop-up alarms are displayed in the Alarm Image window, they are not automatically accepted. They can be displayed on multiple users' displays simultaneously.

When a user accepts an auto pop-up alarm, it is removed from all other users Alarm Lists and alarm displays.

Enterprise System

The target of a Bosch VMS Enterprise System is to enable a user of Operator Client to

simultaneously access multiple Management Server computers.

The Management Server where you configure a list of further Management Server computers is

called Enterprise Management Server. This server can additionally play the role of a normal

Management Server.

See also

Creating an Enterprise System, 81

Scenarios

The following three scenarios are covered.

Scenario 1: A dedicated server plays the role of an Enterprise Management Server. This server has the only task to manage the simultaneous access of an Operator Client workstation to multiple Management Server computers.

An Operator Client workstation logs on to an Enterprise Management Server. After successful logon the user of Operator Client has access to the devices of all configured Management

Server computers.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Concepts | en 189

Figure 24.1: Enterprise Scenario 1

Scenario 2: A Management Server computer has the additional task of an Enterprise

Management Server to manage the access to all Management Server computers including itself.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

190 en | Concepts Bosch Video Management System

Figure 24.2: Enterprise Scenario 2

Scenario 3: The classic client-server architecture remains supported.

Figure 24.3: Classic Scenario 3

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Concepts | en 191

24.2.2

24.2.3

24.2.4

Permissions

Permissions on an Enterprise System

For an Enterprise System you configure the following groups of permissions:

– Operating permissions of Operator Client that the user needs for working with the devices of all configured Management Server computers, for example the user interface of the alarm monitor.

Use an Enterprise User Group. Configure it on the Enterprise Management Server.

– Device permissions valid on each Management Server.

Use Enterprise Access. Configure it on each Management Server.

Permissions on a single Management Server

For managing the access to only one Management Server, use the standard user group. You configure all permissions on this Management Server in this user group.

You can configure dual authorization user groups for standard user groups and for Enterprise

User Groups. Dual authorization is not available for Enterprise Access.

Types of user groups

Name of the user group type

User group

Enterprise User

Group

Enterprise Access

Dual authorization user group

Enterprise dual authorization

Does it contain users?

Yes

Yes

No

No

No

Available configuration settings

– Operating and device permissions

Where do you configure?

– Management

Server

– Operating permissions

– Per Management

Server in the server list: Name of the corresponding

Enterprise Account with logon credentials

Enterprise

Management

Server

– Device permissions

– Logon credentials

– Management Server permissions

Management

Server

Management

Server

– Per Management

Server: Name of the corresponding

Enterprise User Group with logon credentials

– Enterprise

Management

Server

Table 24.1: Types of user groups

Licensing

Bosch VMS Enterprise (MBV-BENT) version license is required at each Enterprise Management

Server to enable the feature.

Per connecting Management Server planned to be a member of an Enterprise System, 1 license is required (MBV-XSUB).

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

192 en | Concepts

24.3

24.3.1

Bosch Video Management System

To update an existing Bosch VMS license to an Enterprise System, you need an Enterprise

Upgrade license (MBV-FEUP).

Per workstation the existing workstation license (MBV-XWST) is required.

Connecting Bosch Allegiant Matrix to Bosch Video

Management System

The Bosch Video Management SystemAllegiant Matrix interface provides seamless access to

analog matrix cameras in the Operator Client interface. Allegiant cameras appear almost identical to IP cameras. The only difference is a small grid symbol on the camera to indicate that it is a Allegiant camera. You can display cameras using the same tasks as for IP cameras.

They are included both in the Logical Tree and the site maps, and users can add them to their

Favorites Trees. In-video-window control for Allegiant-connected PTZ cameras is supported,

and you can easily display Allegiant cameras on analog monitors connected to IP decoders.

Bosch Video Management System provides an interface to the matrix switch via the Allegiant

MCS (Master Control Software) application). The MCS, in this case, runs invisibly in the

background. This software provides an efficient, event-driven interface to the Allegiant. It provides fast, real-time event response from the Allegiant to Bosch Video Management

System. So, for example, if a defective coax cable results in video loss in the Allegiant, an immediate notification is sent to Bosch Video Management System. Also, you can program

Bosch Video Management System to respond to Allegiant alarms.

Bosch Allegiant Connection Overview

To achieve a connection between Bosch Video Management System and an Allegiant matrix switching system, you configure a control channel between the Bosch Video Management

System and the Allegiant matrix.

Two scenarios are possible:

– Local connection

The Management Server controls the Allegiant matrix.

– Remote connection

A dedicated Bosch Allegiant PC connected to the network controls the Allegiant matrix.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

Local connection

Concepts | en 193

Figure 24.4: Bosch Video Management System local connection to a Bosch Allegiant matrix switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

Bosch Video Management System Client workstations

Management Server with Master Control Software

RS-232 connection

Allegiant matrix

encoders

Network

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

194 en | Concepts

Remote connection

Bosch Video Management System

Figure 24.5: Bosch Video Management System remote connection to a Bosch Allegiant matrix switch

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Bosch Video Management System Client workstations

Management Server with Master Control Software

Network

Allegiant PC with Master Control Software

RS-232 connection

encoders

Allegiant matrix

24.3.2

Configuring the control channel

Perform the following tasks to configure the control channel:

– Wiring

– Installing the software

– Creating Allegiant configuration file

– Adding the Allegiant matrix to Bosch Video Management System

– Configuring user names

Wiring

To configure the control channel between Bosch Video Management System and the Allegiant matrix, connect one PC through an RS-232 serial port to the Allegiant's console port (use the specified Bosch cable for connection). This can be the Bosch Video Management System

Management Server, or any other PC on the network.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Concepts | en 195

24.3.3

Installing Allegiant Master Control Software

1.

Stop the Management Server service if running (Start > Control Panel > Services > Rightclick Bosch VMS Management Server > Stop)

2.

Install the Allegiant Master Control Software on the Management Server and on the

Allegiant PC (if present).

3.

On an remote Allegiant PC configure it to start the Allegiant Network Host program

(ld_alghw.exe) on startup. This starts the necessary Allegiant services to allow other PCs on the network to access the Allegiant. The software runs invisibly. It is not necessary to have a dongle attached to this computer.

To have the service started on computer startup automatically, copy a link to ld_alghw.exe to the Startup folder of your computer.

Creating a Bosch Allegiant configuration file

1.

Using the Allegiant Master Control Software, create a Allegiant configuration file that specifies the computer attached to the Allegiant matrix. For this task, the Master Control dongle is required.

2.

On the Transfer menu, click Communication Setup. In the Current Host list, enter the

DNS name of the computer connected to the Allegiant matrix, and enter the serial port

parameters (COM port number, baud rate, etc.) of the Allegiant-connected serial port.

This allows the Master Control Software on the Management Server or PC to go on-line with the Allegiant system. If this is not successful, ensure that either the Master Control

Software or the Allegiant Network Host program is running on the computer attached to the Allegiant matrix, and that the network security is configured to allow remote access to this computer.

3.

On the Transfer menu, click Upload. Select all tables and click Upload. To save the configuration file, select a directory.

4.

Exit the Master Control Software.

Adding the Bosch Allegiant matrix to Bosch Video Management System

1.

Start the Bosch Video Management System Management Server service, start the

Configuration Client, and add the Allegiant device by adding this configuration file (see

Adding a device, 29 for the step-by-step instruction).

2.

Ensure that the Allegiant Master Control Software configuration file used in Bosch Video

Management System matches the current Allegiant configuration.

Bosch Video Management System runs the required components of Master Control

Software invisibly in the background.

Configuring the user name for logging on the Allegiant services

If the Allegiant matrix is connected to a PC in the network and not to the Management Server, ensure that the Allegiant services on this PC and on the Management Server log on with the same user account. This user must be member of an administrators group.

Further notes in the documentation

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available windows:

Matrix Switches page, 105

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available step-by-step instructions:

Configuring a Bosch Allegiant device, 34

Bosch Allegiant Satellite System Concept

The Allegiant matrix switch allows multiple Allegiant systems to be tied together using the

Satellite concept. In this case, multiple Allegiant systems can appear to the Bosch Video

Management System as one large system, providing access to all cameras on all systems.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

196 en | Concepts Bosch Video Management System

In an Allegiant Satellite System, monitor outputs of a slave Allegiant are tied to video inputs on

the master Allegiant. This connection is called a trunk line. In addition, a control channel is

established between the master and the slave. When a camera from a slave Allegiant is requested from the master Allegiant, a command is sent to the slave instructing it to switch the requested camera to a trunk line. At the same time, the master Allegiant switches the trunk input to the requested master Allegiant monitor output. This completes the video connection from the requested slave camera to the desired master monitor.

Figure 24.6: Bosch Allegiant system extended with Satellite switches

24.4

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

Bosch Video Management System Client workstations

Management Server with Master Control Software

Network

Allegiant PC with Master Control Software

RS-232 connection

encoders

Allegiant matrix

8 Allegiant Satellite matrix

You can apply the Satellite concept such that an Allegiant can be both a master and a slave. In this way, each Allegiant can view cameras from the others. It is only necessary to connect trunk lines and control lines in both directions, and to properly configure the Allegiant tables.

The concept can be further extended, with no practical limit, to multiple Allegiant systems. An

Allegiant can have many slaves, and it can be a slave to many masters. You can program the

Allegiant tables to allow or disallow user access to camera views as required by site policies.

Allegiant CCL commands supported in Bosch VMS

To use the CCL commands you need the CCL User Guide. This manual is available in the

Online Product Catalog in the document section of each LTC Allegiant Matrix.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

Supported command

Switching/Sequence

LCM

LCMP

MON+CAM

MON-RUN

MON-HOLD

SEQ-REQ

SEQ-ULD

Receiver/Driver

R/D

REMOTE-ACTION

REMOTE-TGL

PREPOS-SET

PREPOS

AUX-ON

AUX-OFF

VARSPEED_PTZ

Alarm

+ALARM

-ALARM

System

Concepts | en 197

Description

Switch Logical Camera to

Monitor

Switch Logical Camera to

Monitor with Pre-position

Call

Switch Physical Camera to

Monitor

Run Sequence by Monitor

Number

Hold Sequence by Monitor

Number

Sequence Request

Sequence Unload

Basic Control commands

Simultaneous Pan/Tilt/

Zoom Control commands

Toggle Pan/Tilt/Zoom

Control commands

Set Pre-position

Call Pre-position

Auxiliary Control commands

– Auxiliary On

– Auxiliary Off

Variable Speed Control commands

Activate an alarm

Deactivate an alarm

Remarks

LCM, LCM+ and LCM- are equivalent.

Used to control virtual inputs. For example "+alarm 1" closes virtual input 1, "-alarm 1" opens virtual input 1

Opens a virtual input in

Bosch VMS.

Closes a virtual input in

Bosch VMS.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

198 en | Concepts

24.5

24.5.1

i

Bosch Video Management System

Supported command

Switching/Sequence

TC8x00>HEX

TC8x00>DECIMAL

Description

Set Hexadecimal Mode

Set Decimal Mode

Remarks

Connecting CCTV keyboard to Bosch Video Management

System

This chapter provides background information on configuring a CCTV keyboard.

Scenarios for CCTV keyboard connections

You can connect a CCTV keyboard to the COM port of a Bosch Video Management System workstation (scenario 1) or to a hardware decoder (e.g. VIP XD, scenario 2).

If you connect the keyboard to a Bosch Video Management System workstation, you can control the complete system. If you connect the keyboard to a decoder, you can only control the analog monitors of the system.

If you connect the keyboard to an Enterprise Operator Client, you can control the cameras of a specific Management Server by first pressing the server key to type in the number of this server and then type the camera number.

Notice!

For connecting the CCTV keyboard with a Bosch Video Management System workstation, use the specified Bosch cable.

For connecting the CCTV keyboard with a VIP XD decoder, you need a cable which connects a

serial COM port of the keyboard with the serial interface of the decoder. See Connecting a

CCTV keyboard to a decoder, 199 for connections.

CCTV keyboard connected to a Bosch VMS workstation

Figure 24.7: Scenario 1: CCTV keyboard connected to a Bosch Video Management System workstation

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

1

2

3

4

5

6

Various cameras connected to network via encoders

Bosch Video Management System workstation

CCTV keyboard

Bosch Video Management System network

Decoder

Analog monitors

CCTV keyboard connected to a decoder

Concepts | en 199

Figure 24.8: Scenario 2: CCTV keyboard connected to a decoder

1

2

Various cameras connected to network via encoders

Bosch Video Management System workstation

Bosch Video Management System network 3

4

5

CCTV keyboard

Decoder

6 Analog monitors

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available windows:

CCTV Keyboards page, 116

Follow these references to get detailed information on the available step-by-step instructions:

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (workstation), 37

Configuring a CCTV keyboard (decoder), 37

Configuring a decoder for use with a CCTV keyboard, 32

24.5.2

Connecting a CCTV keyboard to a decoder

Configuring the decoder

See Configuring a decoder for use with a CCTV keyboard, 32 for details.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

200 en | Concepts Bosch Video Management System

Connections between COM port and VIP XD decoder

The following table lists the connections between an RS232 adapter and a serial interface of a

VIP XD decoder:

4

5

2

3

6

RS232 adapter

1

Serial interface of a VIP XD decoder

TX

RX

GND

7

8

CTS

RTS

9

The following illustration shows the pinout of a standard RS232 adapter (1) and the pinout of the decoder’s serial adapter (2):

1 2

5 4 3 2 1

9 8 7 6

24.5.3

Updating CCTV keyboard firmware

1.

On any PC, install the IntuiKey downloader.

2.

Start IntuiKey Firmware Upgrade Utility.

3.

Connect the keyboard with a valid serial cable (refer to Bosch Support if such a cable is not available) to this PC.

4.

On the keyboard, press Keyboard Control softkey, then Firmware Upgrade.

5.

Enter the password: 0 and 1 simultaneously.

The keyboard is in bootloader mode.

6.

On the PC, click Browse to select the firmware file: for example kbd.s20

7.

Set the COM port.

8.

Click the Download button to download the firmware.

On the keyboard display, Programming is displayed.

Do not press the Clr key now. Otherwise the keyboard is not usable after restart (see

Notice below).

9.

Click Browse to select the language: for example 8900_EN_..82.s20

On the keyboard display, Programming is displayed.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System i

Concepts | en 201

10. Close IntuiKey Firmware Upgrade Utility.

11. On the keyboard, press Clr key to exit.

The keyboard restarts. Wait some seconds until the menu for selecting the keyboard language appears.

12. Select the desired language with a softkey.

The default start display appears.

Notice!

For starting the bootloader mode directly, you can unplug the power supply from the keyboard, press 0 and 1 simultaneously, plug In the power supply again, release 0 and 1.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

202 en | Troubleshooting

25

Bosch Video Management System

Troubleshooting

This chapter contains information on how to handle known problems using Bosch Video

Management System Configuration Client.

Problems after updating Bosch Video Management System

Issue

The NVR does not record

after updating Bosch Video

Management System.

Cause

The connection between NVR

and Management Server was

lost after the update. The update can potentially have changed the Bosch VMS database on the Management

Server. The NVR must “know” these changes.

Solution

Reestablish the connection between NVR and

Management Server.

Problems during installation

Issue

Setup displays wrong characters.

Setup stops with a message that OPC Server cannot be installed.

The software cannot be uninstalled by executing

Setup.

Cause

The Windows language settings are not correct.

OPC Server files cannot be overwritten.

Solution

Configuring the desired language in Windows, 204

Uninstall OPC Core

Components Redistributable and restart Bosch VMS Setup.

Start Control Panel > Add/

Remove Programs and uninstall Bosch Video

Management System.

Problems immediately after starting the application

Issue

Bosch Video Management

System displays the wrong language.

The logon dialog box of

Operator Client shows the wrong language.

Cause

Windows is not switched to the desired language.

Solution

Configuring the language of

Configuration Client, 19

or

Configuring the language of

Operator Client, 19

Although you have changed the language for Operator

Client in Configuration Client, the language for the logon dialog box of Operator Client depends on the Windows language.

Configuring the desired language in Windows, 204

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Troubleshooting | en 203

Problems with display language

Issue

Some display texts in

Configuration Client or

Operator Client are in a foreign language, usually

English.

Cause Solution

The OS language of the computer where the

Management Server is installed, is often English.

Hence, when the Bosch Video

Management System database is generated on this computer, many display texts are created in English. They remain unchanged regardless of the Windows language of an Operator Client computer.

To avoid such language discrepancies, install

Management Server software on a computer with the desired Windows interface language.

Do not change this.

Problems with CCTV keyboard

Issue

The CCTV keyboard triggers an alarm and the softkey display displays Off Line.

Cause Solution

The connection to the workstation is lost. Either the cable is damaged or unplugged, or the workstation has been reset.

Reestablishing the connection to a CCTV keyboard, 204

Problems with the settings in the recording control of your soundcard

Issue

Feedbacks occur when using

a microphone for Intercom functionality.

Cause

In the recording control of your soundcard the microphone must be selected, not the stereo mix

(or something else).

Operator Client checks its configuration file during startup and changes the settings in the recording control accordingly. This configuration file contains a default entry which might not match your system configuration. This setting is restored during each start of

Operator Client.

Solution

Change the setting in the configuration file of Operator

Client to microphone.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

204 en | Troubleshooting

25.1

25.2

25.3

25.4

Bosch Video Management System

Crashing Configuration Client

Issue Cause

Configuration Client crashes. If there are many cameras configured in an Allegiant file which are not connected to

Bosch Video Management

System, you can reduce this number. This avoids unnecessary system load.

Crashing Operator Client

Issue

Operator Client crashes.

Cause

DiBos Web client is installed and has been started on the computer where Operator

Client is installed.

Solution

See Reducing the number of

Allegiant cameras, 204.

Solution

Uninstall the DiBos Web client.

Configuring the desired language in Windows

If you want to change the display language for the setup of Bosch Video Management System, you must switch the language in your Windows. For activating the language settings the computer is restarted after performing the following steps.

To configure the desired language:

1.

Click Start, click Control Panel, and then double-click Regional and Language Options.

2.

Click the Advanced tab, under Language for non-Unicode programs, select the desired language.

3.

Click OK.

4.

In each of the next message boxes, click Yes.

Your computer is restarted.

Reestablishing the connection to a CCTV keyboard

1.

Plug in the cable again or wait until the workstation is online.

The Off Line message disappears.

2.

Press the Terminal softkey to enter Bosch Video Management System.

Reducing the number of Allegiant cameras

You need the Allegiant Master Control Software to edit the Allegiant file.

To reduce the number of Allegiant cameras:

1.

Start the Master Control Software.

2.

Open the Allegiant file.

3.

Click the Camera tab.

4.

Mark the cameras that are not required.

5.

On the Edit menu, click Delete.

6.

Save the file. The file size remains unchanged.

7.

Repeat the last step for monitors that you do not need. Click the Monitors tab.

8.

Import this file in Bosch Video Management System (see Adding a device, 29).

Restoring a system configuration

You can restore a system configuration using the exported configuration data and user data.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Troubleshooting | en 205

To restore:

1.

Stop Management Server service and all NVR services.

2.

Unzip the .zip file.

3.

Replace the elements.bvms by the export.bvms.

4.

Replace the UserData folder by the contents of the unzipped UserData folder.

5.

Delete all NVR.elements.bvms at all NVR instances.

6.

Start the Management Server service and all NVR services.

Further configuration files:

– Elements.bvms.bak (from V.2.2 on): Backup file before the last activation incl. history

– Elements_Backup******.bvms: Configuration from an older version. Will be created after a software update.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

206 en | Glossary Bosch Video Management System

Glossary

802.1x

The IEEE 802.1x standard provides a general method for authentication and authorization in

IEEE-802 networks. Authentication is carried out via the authenticator, which checks the transmitted authentication information using an authentication server (see RADIUS server) and approves or denies access to the offered services

(LAN, VLAN or WLAN) accordingly.

Alarm

Event that is configured to create an alarm. This is a particular situation (motion detected, doorbell rung, signal lost, etc.) that requires immediate attention. An alarm can display live video, playback video, an action plan, a web page, or a map.

Alarm Image window

Image window for displaying one or more Alarm

Image panes.

Alarm List

Window in Bosch Video Management System used to display a list of active alarms.

Allegiant

Bosch family of analog matrix switching systems.

Analog monitor group

A set of analog monitors connected to decoders.

The analog monitor group can be used for alarm processing in a given physical area. For example, an installation with three physically separated control rooms might have three monitor groups.

The monitors in an analog monitor group are logically configured into rows and columns and can be set to full-screen or quad view.

ATM

Automatic Teller Machine

Bosch ATM/POS Bridge

Receives string via serial cable / COM interface and forwards these strings via Ethernet cable

(TCP/IP). The strings are usually POS data or transactions from ATMs.

CCL

Command Console Language. Set of commands that is used to control the functions of a Bosch

Allegiant device.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Command Script

Macro, that the administrator can program to build an automatic action like positioning a PTZ camera or send E-mails. For that functionality

Bosch Video Management System provides a specific set of commands. Command Scripts are divided into Client Scripts and Server Scripts.

Client Scripts are used on client workstations to execute certain tasks that can run on a client workstation. Server Scripts are executed automatically by an event that was triggered in the system. They get arguments provided by the event like date and time. A Command Script can consist of several scriptlets. You can create a Command

Script using the following scripting languages: C#,

VB.Net. Command Scripts are executed in response to events or alarms automatically according to a schedule (Server Scripts only), manually from the Logical Tree, or manually from icons or on maps.

Compound Event

Combination of different events. The combination uses Boolean expressions, i.e. AND and OR. You can combine only state changes, for example the change of a connection state to disconnected or the activation of a schedule.

Debounce time

Time period starting with the occurrence of an event. During this time period no other event of the same type is accepted as a new event. This prevents for example that a switching sensor creates a large number of events. Example 1: The

Motion Detected event occurs and its configured debounce time starts. During this time another

Motion Detected event occurs. This Motion

Detected event is not accepted as a new event.

For events with several states, you can configure priority settings. Example 2: The Motion Detected event occurs and its configured debounce time starts. During this time the Motion Stopped event with the same priority occurs. The Motion

Stopped event is not accepted as a new event.

Example 3: The Motion Detected event occurs and its configured debounce time starts. During this time the Motion Stopped event with a higher priority occurs. The Motion Stopped event is accepted as a new event.

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

Decoder

Changes a digital stream to an analog stream, e.g., to display digital video on a analog monitor.

Device family

Bosch encoders / IP cameras can belong to one of the following device families: - VIPX (H.263 or H.

264) - ARM SD (standard definition) - ARM HD

(high definition) Each device family uses another platform with different functionality. ARM HD is the latest platform and provides extended support for H.264 and HD video resolution.

Device Tree

Hierarchical list of all the available devices in the system.

DNS

Domain Name System. A DNS server converts a

URL (www.myDevice.com, for example) into an IP address on networks that use the TCP/IP protocol.

Dual authorization

Security policy that requires two different users to log on to the Operator Client. Both the users must be member of a normal Bosch Video Management

System user group. This user group (or these user groups if the users are members of different user groups) must be part of a dual authorization group. A dual authorization group has its own access rights within Bosch Video Management

System. This dual authorization group should have more access rights than the normal user group that the user belongs to. Example: User A is member of a user group called Group A. User B is member of Group B. Additionally a dual authorization group is configured with Group A and Group B as members. For the users of Group

A, dual authorization is optional, for users of

Group B it is mandatory. When user A logs on, a second dialog box for confirming the logon is displayed. In this dialog box, a second user can log on if he is available. If not, user A can continue and start the Operator Client. He then has only the access rights of Group A. When user B logs on, again a second dialog box for logging on is displayed. In this dialog box, a second user must log on. If not, user B cannot start the Operator

Client.

Glossary | en 207

Dual streaming

Dual streaming allows an incoming data stream to be encoded simultaneously according to two different, individually configured settings. This creates two data streams: one for live and preevent recording, the other for continuous, motion, and alarm recording.

Duplex

Term used to define the direction of data transmission between two parties. Half-duplex allows data transmission in both directions but not simultaneously. Full-duplex allows simultaneous data transmission.

Dwell time

Preset amount of time a camera is displayed in an

Image window until the next camera is displayed during a camera sequence.

DWF

Design Web Format. Used to display technical drawings on a computer monitor.

DynDNS

Dynamic Domain Name System. A DNS host service that holds IP addresses ready in a database. Dynamic DNS allows you to connect to the device via the Internet using the host name of the device. See DNS.

Encoder

Changes an analog stream to a digital stream, e.g., to integrate analog cameras in a digital system like

Bosch Video Management System. Some encoders can have a local storage like a flash card, a USB hard disk, or they can store their video data on iSCSI devices. IP cameras have an encoder built in.

Enterprise Access

Collection to give one or more Enterprise

Accounts access to devices of Management Server computers.

Enterprise Account

Authorization that enables an Enterprise Operator

Client to connect to devices of a Management

Server that is part of an Enterprise System. In an

Enterprise Account all permissions for the devices of this Management Server are configured. This

Enterprise Operator Client can simultaneously connect to multiple Management Server

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

208 en | Glossary Bosch Video Management System computers. This access is controlled by the membership to an Enterprise User Group, this

Enterprise User Group is related to an Enterprise

Account, this Enterprise Account is related to a

Management Server.

Enterprise Management Server

Bosch VMS Management Server containing a list of further Management Server computers that a user of Operator Client can simultaneously access. Can also act as a normal Management

Server.

Enterprise System

Feature of Bosch Video Management System that allows a user of Operator Client to access multiple Management Server computers simultaneously.

Enterprise User Group

User group that is configured on an Enterprise

Management Server. Defines the users that are authorized to access multiple Management Server computers simultaneously. Defines the operating permissions available for these users.

Event

A circumstance or state that is linked to an alarm and/or an action. Events can arise from many sources such as cameras, archivers, directories, digital inputs, etc. They can include startrecording states, loss of signal states, disk full messages, user logons, digital input triggers, etc.

Failover NVR

Computer in the Bosch Video Management

System environment. Takes over the tasks of a

Primary NVR in case this server fails. This takeover can happen even when the Central Server is not working. Now the Failover NVR records all the cameras of the Primary NVR. When the Primary

NVR is fixed and online again, the recordings are again stored on this NVR, the cameras are switched back automatically. The Failover NVR stops recording. The recordings of the down time of the Primary NVR stay on the Failover NVR.

GSM

Global System for Mobile Communication.

Standard for digital mobile phones.

H.264

Standard for encoding (compressing) digital audio and video for multimedia applications. This standard includes different profiles that can be

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual manufacturer-dependent. The following profiles are available: Baseline, Baseline+, Main Profile.

Baseline (not used in Bosch Video Management

System) supports 2 CIF. Baseline+ supports 4 CIF and provides a better image quality than Baseline.

Main Profile supports 4 CIF and provides a high efficient compression algorithm called CABAC

(Context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding). This serves for high quality encoding for storage.

Hot spot

Mouse sensitive icon in map that is configured in

Configuration Client. Hot spots are cameras, relays, Command Scripts. The user uses it for localizing and selecting a device in a building.

Image pane

Used for displaying live and recorded video of a single camera, a map, or an HTML file.

Image window

Container for Image panes, structured by an

Image window pattern.

Instant playback

Plays the recorded image of the selected camera in an Image pane on the live screen. The start time

(number of seconds in the past, or rewind time) can be configured.

Intercom functionality

Used to talk on the loudspeakers of an encoder.

This encoder must have audio-in and audio-out.

The Intercom functionality can be granted per user group.

IPS

Images per second. Number of video images transmitted or recorded per second.

IQN iSCSI Qualified Name. The initiator name in IQN format is used for provisioning addresses for both iSCSI initiators and targets. With IQN mapping you create an initiator group that controls the access to the LUNs on an iSCSI target and you write the initiator names of each encoder and the

VRM into this initiator group. Only the devices whose initiator names are added to an initiator group are permitted to access a LUN. See LUN and see iSCSI.

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System Glossary | en 209 iSCSI

Internet Small Computer System Interface.

Protocol that manages storage via a TCP/IP network. iSCSI enables access to stored data from everywhere in the network. Especially with the advent of Gigabit Ethernet, it has become affordable to attach iSCSI storage servers simply as remote hard disks to a computer network. In iSCSI terminology, the server providing storage resources is called an iSCSI target, while the client connecting to the server and accessing the resources of the server is called iSCSI initiator.

LUN configured (on the Maps and Structure page) and tailored for each user group (on the User Groups page).

Logical Unit Number. Used in the iSCSI environment to address an individual disk drive or a virtual partition (volume). The partition is part of a RAID disk array (the iSCSI target).

Management Server

Computer in the Bosch Video Management

System environment for central management.

IVA

Intelligent Video Analysis. Algorithm that detects specific properties and the behavior of objects in a scene monitored by a video camera and from this generates alarm events that, in turn, can be processed in a CCTV system. Recording with IVA settings activated is a precondition to be able to selectively and quickly search through video material later. IVA makes it possible to capture and evaluate directional movement of objects in such a way that false alarms are prevented to a large extent. IVA adapts automatically to changing environmental conditions and is therefore largely non-sensitive to perturbing influences such as rain and tree movement. Especially when used for forensic search, IVA allows for filtering moving objects by their color specifications. With the aid of IVA algorithm extensive video material can be searched selectively for objects with specific color properties.

Master Control Software

Software used as interface between Bosch Video

Management System and an Allegiant device.

Version 2.8 or greater is used.

Metadata

Data of a POS or ATM like date and time or bank account number stored with the corresponding video data to provide additional information for evaluation.

MHT

Also called 'Web Archive'. File format that can save all HTML and image files of an Internet site in one file. To avoid problems we recommend to create MHT files with Internet Explorer 7.0 or higher only.

MPEG-4

Motion Picture Expert Group. Standard for encoding (compressing) digital audio and video for multimedia applications.

LDAP

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Network protocol running over TCP / IP that allows accessing directories. A directory can be for example a list of user groups and their access rights. Bosch Video Management System uses it to get access to the same user groups as MS

Windows or another enterprise user management system.

MSS

Maximum Segment Size. The largest amount of data, specified in bytes, that a computer or communications device can handle in a single, unfragmented piece.

MTU

Maximum Transmission Unit. Describes the maximum amount of data (in bytes) that can be transferred without being fragmented.

Logbook

Container for logging all events in Bosch Video

Management System.

Logical Tree

Tree with a customized structure of all the devices. The Logical Tree is used in the Operator

Client to select cameras and other devices. In the

Configuration Client, the "Full Logical Tree" is

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual

Multicast

Communication between a single transceiver and multiple receivers on a network by distribution of a single data stream on the network to a number of receivers in a defined group. Requirement for multicast operation is a multicast compliant network with implementation of the UDP protocol and the IGMP protocol.

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

210 en | Glossary

Network monitoring

Measurement of network related values and evaluation of these values against configurable thresholds.

NVR

Bosch Network Video Recorder; computer in the

Bosch Video Management System storing audio and video data, acting as Failover NVR, or as

Redundant NVR. This NVR is different from the

VIDOS NVR which can be integrated in Bosch

Video Management System.

OID

Object Identifier. Term in the SNMP environment.

Determines a MIB variable.

Operator Client

Component of Bosch Video Management System that provides the user interface for system monitoring and operation.

OSD

On-screen Display: Menus are shown on the display monitor.

Port

1) On computer and telecommunication devices, a port (noun) is generally a specific place for being physically connected to some other device, usually with a socket and plug of some kind.

Typically, a personal computer is provided with one or more serial ports and usually one parallel port. 2) In programming, a port (noun) is a "logical connection place" and specifically, using the

Internet protocol, TCP/IP, the way a client program specifies a particular server program on a computer in a network. Higher-level applications that use TCP/IP such as the Web protocol,

Hypertext Transfer Protocol, have ports with preassigned numbers. These are known as "wellknown ports" that have been assigned by the

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA).

Other application processes are given port numbers dynamically for each connection. When a service (server program) initially is started, it is said to bind to its designated port number. As any client program wants to use that server, it also must request to bind to the designated port number. Port numbers are from 0 to 65535. Ports

1 to 1023 are reserved for use by certain

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Bosch Video Management System privileged services. For the HTTP service, port 80 is defined as a default and it does not have to be specified in the Uniform Resource Locator (URL).

POS

Point of sale.

Primary NVR

Computer in the Bosch Video Management

System environment. A Primary NVR stores audio and video data.

PTZ camera

Camera with pan, tilt, and zoom function.

RADIUS server

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service: a client/server protocol for the authentication, authorization and accounting of users with dial-up connections on a computer network. RADIUS is the de-facto standard for central authentication of dial-up connections via Modem, ISDN, VPN,

Wireless LAN (see 802.1x) and DSL.

RAID

Redundant array of independent disks. Used for organizing two or more hard disks as if they were one drive. On such a drive data is shared or replicated. This is used to achieve greater capacity, reliability, and speed.

Recording Schedule

Used for scheduling recording and for scheduling some events like starting backup or limiting log on. Recording Schedules cannot have gaps or overlaps. It also determines the video recording quality.

Redundant NVR

Computer in the Bosch Video Management

System environment. Records the same video and audio data as the Primary NVR. A Primary NVR can have maximum one Redundant NVR.

Reference image

A reference image is continuously compared with the current video image. If the current video image in the marked areas differs from the reference image, an alarm is triggered. This allows you to detect tampering that would otherwise not be detected, for example if the camera is turned.

Rewind time

Number of seconds in the past when an Image pane is switched to instant playback.

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

RTSP

Real Time Streaming Protocol. A network protocol which allows to control the continuous transmission of audio-visual data or software over

IP-based networks.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol. IP based protocol that allows to get information from networking devices (GET), to set parameters on network devices (SET) and to be notified about certain events (EVENT).

SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol is a simplified version of NTP (see NTP). SNTP can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation described in RFC 1305 is not needed or justified. SNTP version 4 is described in

RFC 2030 (see RFC).

Task Schedule

Used for scheduling events which can occur in

Bosch Video Management System, for example executing a Command Script. In Events you assign

Task Schedules to events. For scheduling events you can also use Recording Schedules. With a standard Task Schedule you configure time periods for every day of the week, for holidays, and for exception days. With a recurring Task

Schedule you configure recurring time periods.

They can recur every day, every week, every month, or every year.

Timeline

Part of the Bosch Video Management System user interface. Displays lines as graphical representations of the recordings of the selected cameras. The Timeline allows you to navigate through recorded videos.

Trap

Term in the SNMP environment for an unrequested message from a monitored device

(agent) to the network monitoring system

(manager) about an event in this device.

Trunk line

Analog outputs of an analog matrix that are connected to an encoder device. Thereby matrix video sources can be used in the Bosch Video

Management System.

Glossary | en 211

URI

Uniform Resource Identifier. String for identifying a network resorce. Each URI consists of scheme, authority, path, query, fragment. Only scheme and fragment are mandatory. Example: http:<scheme>

\\example.com<authority>/over/therepath>?

name=ferret<query>#nose<fragment>

User group

User groups are used to define common user attributes, such as permissions, privileges and

PTZ priority. By becoming a member of a group, a user automatically inherits all the attributes of the group.

Video resolution

Specification of horizontal and vertical pixels transferred with video signals. PAL: 1CIF = 352 x

288 2CIF = 704 x 288 4CIF = 704 x 576 QCIF =

176 x 144 NTSC 1CIF = 352 x 240 2CIF = 704 x

240 4CIF = 704 x480 QCIF = 176 x120 HD 720p = encoded 1280 x 720 1080p = encoded 1920 x

1080

Video Streaming Gateway

Virtual device that allows integrating Bosch cameras, ONVIF cameras, JPEG cameras, RTSP cameras.

VIDOS NVR

VIDOS Network Video Recorder. Software that stores the audio and video data of IP encoders on a RAID 5 disk array or any other storage medium.

VIDOS NVR provides functions for playback and retrieval of the recorded video. You can integrate cameras in your Bosch Video Management System that are connected to a VIDOS NVR computer.

Virtual input

Used for forwarding events from third-party systems to Bosch Video Management System.

VRM

Video Recording Manager. Software package in

Bosch Video Management System which manages storing video (MPEG-4 SH++ and H.264) and audio data on iSCSI devices in the network. VRM maintains a database containing the recording source information and a list of associated iSCSI drives. VRM is realized as a service running on a computer in the Bosch Video Management System network. VRM does not store data itself but

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

212 en | Glossary distributes storage capacities on iSCSI devices to the encoders, while handling load balancing between multiple iSCSI devices. VRM streams playback video and audio data from iSCSI to

Operator Clients.

Bosch Video Management System

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

Index

Numerics

16

9, 74

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Index | en 213

A access denied

Allegiant CCL emulation, 118

accessing the Help, 11

acquire PTZ control, 76

activate, 78

Bosch Video Management System, 18

previous configuration, 79

activation, 19

configuration, 78

delayed, 78, 92

Activation Key , 92

add Bosch Allegiant input alarm, 87

add Bosch ATM/POS bridge, 86

alarm map, 168

alarm message, 137

alarm mode stamping, 136

alarm priority, 76

alarm recording, 168

alarm recording mode, 158

alarm recording time (NVR), 168

alarm recording time (VRM), 159

alarm rule, 135

alarm sequence, 93, 168

Allegiant

CCL emulation, 30, 38

control channel, 194, 196

firmware version, 16

Network Host program, 195

PTZ camera, 158

Satellite System, 196

too many cameras, 204

Allegiant CCL emulation

access denied, 118

Allegiant file, 204

Allegiant matrix, 29, 34, 105

analog matrix, 21, 105

analog monitor group, 21, 24, 29, 30, 35, 94, 108,

109, 171

add, 30

controlled by workstations, 35, 94

default, 30

initial camera, 35

OSD, 35 quad view, 35 single view, 35 startup camera, 35

archive, 26

Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

214 en | Index

ARM firmware, 157

ATM POS device, 29

Audio Intercom functionality, 183

Authorization Number , 92

automatic alarm popup behavior, 188 automatic display of alarms, 188

automatic recording mode, 120

automatic relogon, 78 automatic restart, 78

B backup

NVR, 101

basic configuration, 38

Bosch IntuiKey Digital Keyboard, 16, 17

Bosch Script API help, 66

Bosch Video Management System, 14

activate, 18

GUI language, 203

licensing, 18

Online Help, 11

overview, 14

update, 202

BVIP device

password, 128 web page, 128

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Bosch Video Management System

C

CABAC, 94, 161

camera mode , 93, 160

camera name stamping, 136

camera round, 150

camera round , 46, 152

camera sequence, 150

camera sequence , 46, 152

CCL emulation, 38

CCTV keyboard, 16, 17, 21, 29, 31, 32, 106, 198, 200

connection loss, 203

change IP address, 24, 29, 33, 34, 98, 99

change network address, 24, 29, 33, 34

CHAP password, 120

chattering sensors, 61

chattering sensors , 64

Client Command Script

alarm accepted, 171

executed on startup, 67

codecs, 56, 157

Command Script, 150

Bosch Script API help, 66

export, 67 import, 67

Command Script , 46

Commercial Type Number, 92

communication devices, 21

Compound Events , 63, 163

configuration

offline, 78 off-site, 78

configuration data

export, 79

configuration data to OPC

export, 79

configure VRM recording, 87

conflicts with IP addresses, 24

connecting

Allegiant matrix and Bosch VMS, 192

CCTV keyboard and Bosch VMS, 198

connection string, 94

control of a camera, 88

control of a camera , 56

copy and paste , 55

crash

Configuration Client, 204

Operator Client, 204

create

Command Script , 66

customized events , 63, 163

Configuration Manual Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

D

data sheet, 15

decoder, 21

CCTV keyboard, 32

decoupled, 20

default analog monitor group, 30

default configuration, 38

default IP address, 97

delayed activation, 78, 92

device ID, 128, 129

device identification, 128 device name, 128

Device Tree, 95, 150

Devices pane, 150

DiBos

version, 16

DiBos device, 29

DiBos system, 21

digital keyboard, 16, 17, 21, 29, 31, 106

disconnected, 20

dome camera , 59, 162

dual authorization, 176

dual streaming, 107

duplicate IP addresses, 24, 97

duplicating an event , 62

E

E-mail device, 29

encoder, 21

encoding on NVRs, 95

Enterprise System, 188

examples, 81

add Bosch Allegiant input alarm, 87

add Bosch ATM/POS bridge, 86

configure VRM recording, 87

exception days, 53

export

Command Script , 67

configuration data, 79 configuration data to OPC, 79

Index | en 215

F

factory default IP address, 24

Failover NVR, 98, 100

filtering, 95, 99, 150, 156, 163, 165, 167, 173

finding

devices, 95, 99, 150, 156, 163, 165, 167, 173

information in the Help , 11

Firewall, 125

firmware upgrade

CCTV keyboard, 200

Forensic Search, 35, 88, 106, 107

G

global alarm settings, 65

GUI language, 203

H

H.264, 94, 161

H.264 BP, 157

H.264 BP+, 157

H.264 deblocking filter, 94, 161

H.264 MP, 157

H.264 MP Low Latency, 157

HD cameras, 74

help, 11 help , 11

holidays, 53

hot spots, 150

HTML files, 150

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

216 en | Index

I

I/O modules, 21, 30

identification, 128

import

Command Script , 67

resource files, 44

initial camera, 109

initial device scan, 24

Initiator extension, 129

Initiator name, 129

inputs, 21

Intercom functionality, 183

interface settings

VIP XD, 32

IntuiKey Digital Keyboard, 16

IntuiKey keyboard, 21, 29, 31, 106

IP address

change, 24, 29, 33, 34, 98, 99

conflict, 24 duplicate, 24

duplicates, 97

iPad, 119 iPhone, 38, 119

IQN mapping, 38 iSCSI device, 38

iSCSI password, 120

K

keep protected recordings, 101

L

language, 203

Configuration Client, 94

Operator Client, 174

license, 19

licensing

Bosch Video Management System, 18

Stratus server, 18

link to map , 48

local drive, 103

log file information, 142

Logbook database, 94 connection string, 94

logging, 61, 62, 64

Logging, 121

Logical Tree, 44, 171

2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client Configuration Manual

Bosch Video Management System

M

Management Server, 15, 20, 188

manual recording, 168

manual recording mode, 120

manual recording time (NVR), 168

manual recording time (VRM), 159

map link , 48

maps, 150

Master server, 120

menu commands, 90

multi monitor mode, 74

multicast, 125

multi-select , 44

N network address

change, 24, 29, 33, 34

network monitoring device, 29

network scan, 97

new DiBos devices, 34

NVR, 15

backup, 101

local drive, 103

remove, 26

O

offline, 20

offline configuration, 78 off-site configuration, 78

online application Help, 11

ONVIF

stream, 125 token, 125

OPC Server, 202

Operator Client, 14, 44

outputs, 21

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Bosch Video Management System

P

password, 128

peripheral device, 29

permissions, 44, 150

post-event time, 158

post-event time , 159

pre-event time, 158

pre-event time , 159

previous configuration, 79

Primary NVR, 98, 100

printing the Help, 11

profile , 93, 160

PTZ blocking, 76, 178, 184

PTZ camera

Allegiant, 158

PTZ camera , 59, 162

PTZ control

blocking, 76, 178, 184

push-to-talk, 183

Q

quad view, 35, 109

R

RAID subsystems, 17

recording mode

automatic, 120 manual, 120

Recording preferences, 131

recording quality , 93, 160

Recording Table, 156

Redundant NVR, 27, 100

refresh states, 90, 98

relays, 21

Release Notes, 15

remove

NVR, 26

replace content, 44

resource files

import, 44 resource files , 44

restore system configuration, 204

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

S scan

across subnets, 94 in subnets, 94

scan for conflicting IP addresses, 24, 97

scan for IP devices, 97 scan network, 24, 97

sequence , 152

Server initiator name, 120

Server name, 120

Server Network, 23, 81

SMS device, 29

software package, 19

software update, 202

states, 90, 98

Stratus server

licensing, 18

system configuration

restore, 204

system requirements, 15

T

Target data rate, 93, 161

time stamping, 136

token, 125

too many Allegiant cameras, 204

transcoding service, 38, 119

U

unreliable network, 119

update, 202

user event button, 62

V

VCA, 132

VIP X1600 XFM4, 94, 161

VIP XD, 16

half-duplex mode, 32 interface settings, 32

quad view, 35

VIPX firmware, 157

virtual input, 21, 29

W

web page, 128

WLAN, 38, 119

workstation, 21, 35, 94

Index | en 217

Configuration Manual 2012.07 | V1 | Configuration Client

Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH

Robert-Bosch-Ring 5

85630 Grasbrunn

Germany www.boschsecurity.com

© Bosch Sicherheitssysteme GmbH, 2012

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

advertisement

Table of contents